Sie sind auf Seite 1von 276

VERSION_J_Draft1_120928

DIRECT DIGITIZER Operation Manual

Introduction

Chapter 1 Safety Precautions


& Warnings

Chapter 2 Product Overview

Chapter 3 Description of Each Screen

Chapter 4 General Operations

Chapter 5 Sequence of Examination

Chapter 6 Various Functions

Chapter 7 Displayed Messages

Chapter 8 Troubleshooting

Chapter 9 Error Codes

Chapter 10 Maintenance

Chapter 11 Specifications

0197
EN
Contents

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 3.5.3 Work area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37


3.5.4 Work area (not during exposure). . . . . 38
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 3.5.5 Types of control panels . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Summary of usability specifications 3.5.6 Control panel (Exp.Info: Exposure
(for IEC/EN 60601-1-6, IEC/EN 62366). . . . . . . . 8 conditions). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Disclaimer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 3.5.7 Control panel (Image Proc: Image
Trademark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 processing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Option/license. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 3.5.8 Control panel (Acquisition). . . . . . . . . . 42
Term description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 3.5.9 Control panel (Aero Sync). . . . . . . . . . 43
Structure of pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 3.5.10 Control panel (QUICK). . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Screen display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 3.5.11 Control panel (Exp.Info: Irradiation
Characters and icons displayed on the screen. . . 12 results). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Notation of operation methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 3.5.12 Control panel (Output - for host) . . . . . 46
Items to be set with the user tool. . . . . . . . . . . . 13 3.5.13 Control panel (Output - for printer). . . . 47
3.5.14 Control panel (Overlay - for host). . . . 48
Chapter 1. 3.5.15 Control panel (Overlay - for printer). . . 49
Safety Precautions & Warnings. . . 15 3.6 Viewer screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
3.7 System monitor screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
1.1 Symbols relating to safety . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3.7.1 Network Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
1.1.1 Safety alert symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3.7.2 Exposure Room. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
1.1.2 Warning notice (signal words). . . . . . . 16
3.7.3 Warranty Component. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
1.1.3 Description of graphic symbols . . . . . . 16
1.2 Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Chapter 4.
1.2.1 Precautions before usage . . . . . . . . . . 17
1.2.2 Precautions for usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 General Operations. . . . . . . . . . 55
1.2.3 Precautions for installing, moving, 4.1 Input panel display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
and storing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 4.2 Startup and shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
1.2.4 Precautions regarding care and 4.2.1 Startup of this device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
maintenance of this device . . . . . . . . . 19 4.2.2 Shutdown of this device. . . . . . . . . . . . 58
1.2.5 Precautions regarding CD/DVD use. . . 20 4.2.3 Link to connected devices. . . . . . . . . . 59
1.2.6 Precautions regarding display monitor 4.3 Login control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 4.3.1 Login screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
1.2.7 Precautions for each function . . . . . . . 21 4.3.2 Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
4.3.3 Logoff. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Chapter 2. 4.3.4 Switch of operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . 23 4.3.5 Access right of operators. . . . . . . . . . . 63
4.3.6 Operation history. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
2.1 Overview of this device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
4.4 Registration of the AeroDR Detector . . . . 64
2.1.1 Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2.1.2 System configuration example. . . . . . . 24
Chapter 5.
Chapter 3. Sequence of Examination. . . . . 65
Description of Each Screen. . . 25 5.1 Screen transition of examinations . . . . . . 66
5.2 Flow of exposure with AeroDR Detector . . 67
3.1 Screen connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
5.3 New registration of patient information . . . 68
3.2 Patient registration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
5.4 Selection of examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
3.2.1 Structure of patient registration
5.5 Exposure with AeroDR Detector . . . . . . . . 71
screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
5.5.1 Manual body part selection . . . . . . . . . 71
3.2.2 Details of application bar. . . . . . . . . . . 28
5.5.2 Exposure of several body parts. . . . . . 72
3.3 List screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
5.6 Image adjustment on the exposure
3.4 Body part selection screen . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
3.5 Exposure screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
5.6.1 Change of S value/G value . . . . . . . . . 75
3.5.1 Structure of the exposure screen. . . . . 34
5.6.2 Change of parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
3.5.2 Examination display area. . . . . . . . . . . 36

3
Contents

5.6.3 Change of ROI area position. . . . . . . . 77 6.5.16 Deletion of registration of CR


5.6.4 Zooming in and out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 cassette registered with bar code . . . 116
5.7 Examination completion and output . . . . . 79 6.5.17 Hold of the examination. . . . . . . . . . . 117
5.8 Flow of exposure with CR cassette . . . . . 80 6.5.18 Overlay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
5.9 Exposure with CR cassette . . . . . . . . . . . 81 6.5.19 Highlight function for the tube/gauze. . 121
5.9.1 Registration methods of CR cassette. . . 81 6.5.20 Automatic 1×1 display function . . . . . 122
5.9.2 Exposure with bar code registration. . 81 6.5.21 Image preview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
5.9.3 Exposure with specified reading 6.6 Functions of the viewer screen . . . . . . . . 125
sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 6.6.1 Change of E/F/HS parameters. . . . . 125
6.6.2 Change of the ROI area. . . . . . . . . . . 126
Chapter 6. 6.6.3 Change of the effective image area. . . 127
Various Functions. . . . . . . . . . . 85 6.6.4 Change of the masking area. . . . . . . 129
6.6.5 How to remove grid again . . . . . . . . . 130
6.1 Function lists of the each screen . . . . . . . 86 6.6.6 Positioning of annotation. . . . . . . . . . 132
6.2 Functions of the patient registration 6.6.7 Adjustment of annotation. . . . . . . . . . 134
screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 6.6.8 Creating/editing of annotation
6.2.1 Search registration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
6.2.2 Emergency registration . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 6.7 Output function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
6.3 Functions of the list screen . . . . . . . . . . . 91 6.7.1 Individual output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
6.3.1 Display of details of examination. . . . . 91 6.7.2 Additional output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
6.3.2 Display of examination history. . . . . . . 91 6.7.3 Change of host (electronic medical
6.3.3 Display of examinations with refined record) output conditions. . . . . . . . . . 138
search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 6.7.4 Change of printer output conditions. . . 139
6.3.4 Modification of examination 6.7.5 Printer output in A format. . . . . . . . . . 140
information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 6.7.6 Printer output in AB format. . . . . . . . . 142
6.3.5 Deletion of examinations. . . . . . . . . . . 95 6.7.7 Sort of preview images (each image)
6.3.6 Addition of exposure conditions to for host output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
completed examinations . . . . . . . . . . . 96 6.7.8 Sort of preview images (each series)
6.3.7 Protection of examinations. . . . . . . . . 98 for host output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
6.4 Functions of the body part selection 6.7.9 Sort of preview images (transmitted)
screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 for host output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
6.4.1 Change of exposure conditions. . . . . . 99 6.7.10 Automatic output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
6.4.2 Deletion of exposure conditions. . . . . . 99 6.8 Functions associated with X-ray
6.4.3 Change of order of exposure irradiation information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 6.8.1 Change of X-ray irradiation
6.5 Functions of the exposure screen . . . . . 101 information (results). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
6.5.1 Change of order of exposures. . . . . . 101 6.8.2 Change of mammogram image X-ray
6.5.2 Discard (deletion of images) . . . . . . . 101 irradiation information (results) . . . . . 150
6.5.3 Cancellation of discard (deletion of 6.8.3 Replacement of X-ray irradiation
images) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 information (results). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
6.5.4 Change of exposure devices. . . . . . . 104 6.9 Functions of the system monitor screen . . 153
6.5.5 Switching from the AeroDR Detector 6.9.1 System status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
to the CR cassette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 6.9.2 Status of the AeroDR Detector. . . . . 154
6.5.6 Switching from the CR cassette to 6.9.3 Device status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
the AeroDR Detector. . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 6.9.4 Host status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
6.5.7 Switching of AeroDR Detectors. . . . . 107 6.9.5 Printer status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
6.5.8 Status of devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 6.9.6 Status of JM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
6.5.9 Edit of image supplemental 6.9.7 Status of RIS-IN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 6.9.8 Status of RIS-OUT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
6.5.10 Edit of patient information . . . . . . . . . 110 6.9.9 EMR Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
6.5.11 Switch of screen display of the 6.9.10 Status of examination sharing
exposure screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 (reception). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
6.5.12 Switch of screen display format. . . . . 113 6.9.11 Status of examination sharing
6.5.13 Full-screen image display . . . . . . . . . 113 (transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
6.5.14 Rotation and flip of display. . . . . . . . . 114 6.10 Exposure with AeroDR Portable RF Unit . . 160
6.5.15 Panning of an image . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

4
Contents

6.10.1 Screen structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 6.18.3 Transmission of examination


6.10.2 Exposure preparations. . . . . . . . . . . . 161 information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
6.10.3 Exposure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 6.18.4 Transmission of examination
6.10.4 Change of the AP information . . . . . . 164 information during exposure . . . . . . . 223
6.10.5 Operations after exposure. . . . . . . . . 166 6.19 Statistics • summary tool . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
6.10.6 Change of the IP address of the 6.19.1 Screen structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
connected institution network. . . . . . 167 6.19.2 Acquisition of various information . . . 225
6.10.7 Other functions of AeroDR 6.19.3 Options of information
Portable RF Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 (filter conditions). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
6.11 Exposure with AeroDR Portable UF Unit . . 169 6.20 Other functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
6.11.1 Screen structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 6.20.1 Switching of the wireless
6.11.2 Exposure preparations. . . . . . . . . . . . 171 communication function of
6.11.3 Exposure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 the AeroDR Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
6.11.4 Change of the AP information . . . . . . 177 6.20.2 Release of the X-ray linkage when
6.11.5 Operations after exposure. . . . . . . . . 179 using AeroDR S-SRM KIT. . . . . . . . . 228
6.11.6 Change of the IP address of the 6.20.3 Screen saver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
connected institution network. . . . . . 179 6.20.4 Bar code reader and magnetic card
6.11.7 Other functions of AeroDR reader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Portable UF Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 6.20.5 Addition of high precision monitor. . . 231
6.12 Manual stitching exposure . . . . . . . . . . . 181 6.20.6 Addition of sub monitor . . . . . . . . . . . 232
6.12.1 Screen structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 6.20.7 Addition of monitor for checking
6.12.2 Exposure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
6.12.3 Image combination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
6.12.4 Image adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Chapter 7.
6.13 Auto stitching exposure with AeroDR Displayed Messages. . . . . . . . 233
Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
6.13.1 Screen structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 7.1 Displayed message types and
6.13.2 Exposure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 description order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
6.13.3 Image combination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 7.1.1 Displayed message types . . . . . . . . . 234
6.13.4 Image adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 7.1.2 Displayed message description
6.14 CR stitching cassette exposure . . . . . . . 195 order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
6.14.1 Screen structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 7.2 Dialog boxes/balloons and
6.14.2 Exposure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 countermeasures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
6.14.3 Image combination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 7.2.1 Messages displayed in dialog boxes
6.14.4 Image adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 and countermeasures . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
6.15 Mammogram exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 7.2.2 Messages displayed in balloons and
6.15.1 Screen structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 countermeasures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
6.15.2 Exposure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
6.15.3 Chest wall blackening process
Chapter 8.
adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . 243
6.16 Media output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
8.1 Various problems and countermeasures . . 244
6.16.1 Screen structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
8.1.1 JM issues. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
6.16.2 Output to media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
8.1.2 Reacquisition of images from the
6.16.3 Operation of the PDI viewer. . . . . . . . 211
AeroDR Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
6.17 Multi-study . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
8.1.3 Deletion of untransferred images in
6.17.1 Screen structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
the AeroDR Detector. . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
6.17.2 Multi-study examination from patient
8.1.4 Reacquisition of images from the
registration screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
REGIUS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
6.17.3 Multi-study examination from list
8.1.5 Communications error during image
screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
6.18 Examination sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
8.1.6 How to release the lock on the
6.18.1 Screen structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
exposure screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
6.18.2 Reception of examination
information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

5
Contents

Chapter 9.
Error Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
9.1 Types of error codes and recognition
methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
9.1.1 Types of error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
9.1.2 Recognition method for error codes. . . 250
9.2 Error codes and countermeasures . . . . . 251
9.2.1 Communication errors. . . . . . . . . . . . 251
9.2.2 Software errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
9.2.3 AeroDR Detector errors. . . . . . . . . . . 256
9.2.4 AeroDR Generator Interface Unit
errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
9.2.5 AeroDR Portable RF Unit errors . . . . 260
9.2.6 AeroDR Stitching System errors . . . . 261
9.2.7 REGIUS series errors . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Chapter 10.
Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
10.1 Maintenance and inspection items . . . . . 266
10.1.1 Maintenance schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . 266
10.1.2 Confirmation and cleaning. . . . . . . . . 266
10.1.3 Periodically replaced parts. . . . . . . . . 267

Chapter 11.
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
11.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
11.1.1 Software specifications . . . . . . . . . . . 270
11.1.2 Hardware specifications. . . . . . . . . . . 271
11.1.3 Hardware specifications (when
using the portable X-ray device) . . . . 272
11.1.4 Optional products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

6
Introduction

7
Introduction

The CS-7 is a software program for installation on a PC. It performs image processing of X-ray images received from
an AeroDR SYSTEM or REGIUS system.
The CS-7 adds patient data received from RIS etc. and sends diagnosis images to PACS etc. Furthermore, the CS-7
can send requests for exposure conditions to the X-ray device and receive irradiation results.

This operation manual describes instructions on the basic functions for operation of this device. Those operating this
device for the first time should read this manual beforehand.
Also, store this manual close to this device after reading it through, so it can be used as a guide to allow optimum
operating conditions.

For United States of America and Canada, this device is not intended to use for Mammography.

* If the pages of the operation manual are smudged and illegible, replace it with a new one. (There is a fee
for this service.)
* In this manual, "this device" refers to a collective term indicating CS-7 software and PC with the software
installed.

Summary of usability specifications (for IEC/EN 60601-1-6, IEC/EN 62366)

(1) Medical purposes


• Provision of disease and injury diagnostic images.
(2) Patient groups
• No patient population exists who uses or is in contact with the device.
• Patient population for the X-ray images read is not specified.
(3) Parts of body or organizations to which the device is mounted or that interact with the device.
• No appropriate points. (Device does not come in contact with the patient.)
(4) Operating principle
• This device CS-7 is a software program for installation and use in commercially available PCs.
Commercially available PCs consist of a PC main body and an LCD monitor. This device receives
X-ray image information from the reader device (REGIUS series, AeroDR Detector) and connects it
with patient information, which will be output after processing into diagnosable images by an opera-
tor. Also, if this device and X-ray device are linked, it submits the exposure parameter based on the
body part and proposed information including collimator information to the X-ray device, and re-
ceives the exposure result and collimator information etc. from the X-ray device.
(5) Significant physical characteristics
• Refer to "11.1 Specifications".
(6) Significant performance characteristics
• Refer to "11.1 Specifications".
(7) User of this device
• No special training is required to use this device. The intended users of this device are as follows.
– A professional in good health with specialist knowledge/qualifications who has fully understood the
content of this document. (Such as a doctor or radiological technologist)

8
Introduction

Disclaimer

(1) This manual may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the permission of Konica Minolta Medical &
Graphic, Inc.
(2) The contents of this manual may be subject to change without prior notice.
(3) Konica Minolta Medical & Graphic, Inc. is not responsible for any claims made for malfunction or damage caused
by installation, relocation, modification, maintenance, and repair made by anyone except Konica Minolta and
contractors designated by Konica Minolta.
(4) Konica Minolta Medical & Graphic, Inc. is not responsible for any claims made for malfunction or damage to
Konica Minolta products, caused by third-party products not installed by Konica Minolta.
(5) Konica Minolta Medical & Graphic, Inc. is not responsible for any claims made for malfunction or damage caused
by maintenance or repair using maintenance parts other than those specified by Konica Minolta.
(6) Konica Minolta Medical & Graphic, Inc. is not responsible for any claims made for malfunction or damage caused
by not observing the precautions and operation methods described in the operation manual.
(7) Konica Minolta Medical & Graphic, Inc. is not responsible for any claims made for malfunction or damage caused
by the environment, such as power source and installation environment, that is described in the Installation
Requirement or operation manual, that is not suitable for the installation requirements.
(8) Konica Minolta Medical & Graphic, Inc. is not responsible for any claims for malfunction or damage caused by
acts of nature such as fires, earthquakes, floods, or lightning strikes.
(9) Konica Minolta Medical & Graphic, Inc. is not responsible for any claims for malfunction or damage caused by
using this device for any purpose other than that specified for this device.
(10) Diagnostic and treatment action is performed under the responsibility of the physician(s). Konica Minolta Medical
& Graphic, Inc. is not responsible for any diagnostic/treatment conditions or diagnostic/treatment results.

Trademark

Company names and product names in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective own-
ers.
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks or trademarks of U.S. Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other
countries.
Windows 7 is an abbreviation for Microsoft Windows 7 operating system Professional Edition.
Please note that ©, ® and ™ marks are omitted hereafter.

Copyright © 2012 Konica Minolta Medical & Graphic, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Option/license

For certain functions of this device, separate options and licenses are needed. For details regarding options and li-
censes, contact Konica Minolta service representatives.

9
Introduction

Term description

The meanings of terms used in this operation manual are as follows:

Terms Description
Collective term indicating AeroDR Detector, AeroDR Interface Unit, AeroDR Generator
AeroDR SYSTEM
Interface Unit, AeroDR Battery Charger, AeroDR Access Point, etc.

AeroDR Detector Collective term indicating AeroDR 1417HQ, AeroDR 1417S and AeroDR 1717HQ.

AeroDR Battery Charger Charges the AeroDR Detector. It also has the registration function for the AeroDR Detector.

AeroDR I/F Cable Used for wired connection with the AeroDR Detector.

AeroDR UF Cable Used when the AeroDR Detector is used only for the wall stand or table position.

AeroDR Portable RF Unit Used when this device is operated through the portable X-ray device.

Used when this device is operated through the portable X-ray device for performing expo-
AeroDR Portable UF Unit
sure in Aero Sync mode.

AeroDR Stitching System Used when performing stitching exposures using the AeroDR Detector.

Calibration Processing for calibrating the characteristics of the AeroDR Detector for each pixel

CR An acronym for computed radiography

DR An acronym for digital radiography

JM An acronym for job manager

RM An acronym for roaming manager

Collective term indicating the REGIUS series.


REGIUS When indicated individually, they are shown as "REGIUS 110", "REGIUS 110HQ",
"REGIUS 210", "REGIUS 190", and "REGIUS 170".

Abbreviation for Radiology Information System


RIS A system to manage reservation and result of examinations and treatment that use radiol-
ogy equipment

Host A server to save image information

An X-ray exposure device constructed of an X-ray generator device, an operation panel,


X-ray device
and so on

Image processing to reduce noise


HS processing
Used to reduce the noise while maintaining the definition of an image.

Image processing for adjusting the sharpness of an image


F processing
Used to maintain the sharpness of each image depending on the exposure body part.

Image processing for compressing the dynamic range


E processing Depending on the body part, used to provide a suitable diagnostic image even with high
contrast images.

Exposure body part This is the exposure body part, such as head, neck, and chest.

Exposure condition master An exposure condition predefined for each body part for the convenience of setting

Exposure condition key Another name of the exposure condition master

The exposure body part and conditions for layout on the body part selection screen. Single
Set key or multiple Exam. Tags are combined in a unit called the set key, which is positioned on the
body part selection screen.

This is a mode in which exposure is performed without being synchronized with the X-ray
Aero Sync
device. (This is sometimes described as "DXARM" or "DXARM link.")

10
Introduction

Structure of pages

(1) 5.7 Examination completion and output

When•all•exposures•are•finished,•end•the•examination•
and•perform•output.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• (4)
•• Always•check•the•X-ray•irradiation•results•before•fin-
ishing•the•examination.•

(2) 1 Press [ ]. •• When•the•examination•ends•and•no•exposure•images•


exist,•the•examination•itself•is•deleted.•At•this•time,•a•
confirmation•screen•is•displayed•on•whether•to•delete•
the•examination.

→•Press•[OK]•to•delete•the•examination•itself.
→•Press•[Cancel]•to•return•to•the•previous•screen.
•• When•the•examination•is•finished,•exposed•im- *• A•message•"No•images•are•captured.•Cannot•com-
ages•are•batch•output•to•a•preset•output•desti- plete• study."• may• be• displayed• depending• on• the•
nation.• settings.• In• such• cases,• press• the• [Pause]• button•
or•[Termination]•button.•Either•of•the•two•buttons•is•
displayed•depending•on•the•settings.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Chapter 5
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
(5)
•• If•there•is•an•unexposed•image,•a•confirmation•screen•
is•displayed.

(3)

•• The•initial•screen•is•displayed. →••Press•[OK]•to• complete•the• examination•by•delet-


ing•data•for•the•unexposed•portion•and•display•the•
initial•screen.•
→•Press•[Cancel]•to•return•to•the•previous•screen.
•• When•outputting•to•a•host,•the•output•destination•can•
be• switched• between• the• predetermined• host• and• a•
backup•host.•Furthermore,•when•the•output•conditions•
are•different•for•each•backup•destination,•recalculation•
of•output•size•is•performed.
•• Depending• on• the• setting• at• the• time• of• installation,•
on•the•edge•of•the•output•film•(the•output•image•when•
output•to•a•host)•a•mark•is•added•showing•whether•the•
image•is•flipped•or•not.
:•Flipped
:•Not•flipped
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

79

Number Item Description Icon


(1) Item heading Describes the titles of described content. -

The operating procedure is described in sequential numerical


(2) Operation procedure -
steps.

(3) Screen display Shows a screen on which operations are performed. -

(4) Important items Describes important items for operation. Be sure to read them. IMPORTANT

(5) Hint Describes important information. HINT

11
Introduction

Screen display

Note that explanatory screens may be omitted from this manual when not needed.

Characters and icons displayed on the screen

Characters and icons displayed on the screen are shown with [ ]. Messages displayed on such as the confirmation
screen are shown with " ".

Notation example of tab: [Image Proc] tab


[Output] tab

Notation example of message: "Are you sure you want to


suspend this study?"

Notation example of button: [Cropping]


[Masking]
[Text]

Notation of operation methods

This manual describes main operation methods as follows.

Notation Description
Operation to touch the screen or click with a mouse to operate operation targets such as
Press
buttons.

Select Operation to select from several options such as from a pull-down menu or tabs.

Input Operation to enter any string using a keyboard or the input panel displayed on the screen.

Drag Operation to move an operation target while touching or clicking it.

Operation to release the operation target being dragged by quitting touching it or releasing
Drop
the button being clicked.

12
Introduction

Items to be set with the user tool

Items to be set with user tool are shown in the following diagram.
More information about the user tool is described in the "CS-7 User Tool Operation Manual".
Tool classification Tool classification
display area Tool selection button Function
selection button
For confirming and editing the information
[Setting] [System] area [Setting] of the institution and device.
For setting the display items of patient.
[Screen Setting]
registration screen, list screen, etc. and the layout.
For editing the patient information
[Patient DB]
registered in the database.

[Panel] area [Panel Setting] For setting AeroDR Detector.

For setting the marker to be


[Overlay] area [Marker]
overlaid on images.
For setting the stamp to be
[Stamp]
overlaid on images.
For adding and editing the settings of
[Exam. Tag] area [Detailed]
exposure conditions.
For associating RIS codes from the RIS
[RIS Code Mapping]
with codes for this device.
For registering and editing the
[Hospital Information] area [Operator]
selection of the operator names.
For registering and editing the
[Department]
selection of the hospital departments.
For registering and editing the
[Location]
selection of the hospital wards.
For saving the settings of this device,
[Backup/Restore] [Backup] area [Backup]
patient information and logs.
For restoring saved settings and patient
[Restore] area [Restore]
information.

[Auto backup] [Setting] For setting the auto backup function.

For restoring or deleting automatically


[Maintain DB and images]
backed up data.

[Adjustment] [System] area [Date and Time] For setting the date and time.

[Touch Panel] For adjusting the touch panel.

For conducting the calibration of the AeroDR


[Panel] area [Calibration]
Detector.

[Update] For updating this device.


[CS-7] area
For displaying the version of this device and updated
[Release Notes]
contents.

[LongLen Unit] area [Adjustment] For adjusting the AeroDR Stitching Unit.

[Analysis] [Image Quality] area [QA/QC] For evaluating and managing image quality.

For aggregating and taking the statistics of exposure


[Statistics Analysis] area [Statistics Analysis]
history.
For setting the dedicated application for aggregating
[Setting]
and taking the statistics of exposure history.

AeroRemote [Image Quality] area [Check] For performing AeroRemote image quality check.

For displaying the image quality report selection


[Report]
screen.
For displaying the image quality timeline graph
[Graph]
selection screen.

13
14
Chapter
1
Safety Precautions & Warnings
This chapter describes precautions and warnings
to ensure safe use of this device.

15
1.1 Symbols relating to safety

1.1.3 Description of graphic


1.1.1 Safety alert symbol
symbols

Indicates the off position for the main


This is the "safety alert symbol". This symbol alerts you power switch of this device.
to matters and/or operation potentially hazardous to
yourself and other people. Read these messages and Indicates the on position for the main
follow the instructions carefully. power switch of this device.

Indicates the power on or standby posi-


1.1.2 Warning notice (signal tion.
words)
Indicates that the AC power is being
Signal words indicate a degree of potential hazards used.
in the use of the product.
Signal words include the following three types, which
Indicates that hazardous voltage is being
are used according to risk of damage caused by dan-
used, and caution is required.
ger and the severity of damage:

DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if
not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. It means conformity with the Medical
0197 Devices Directive 93/42/EEC.
WARNING 0197 is Notified Body number.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if
not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if
not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
It may also be used to indicate a hazardous situation
where only physical damage is likely to occur.

16
1.2 Safety precautions

Read all safety precautions thoroughly before using

Chapter 1
this device. For EU member states only
Be sure to observe the safety precautions described in This symbol means: Do not dispose of this
product together with your household waste!
this section.
Please refer to the information of your local
community or contact our dealers regarding
the proper handling of end-of-life electric and
1.2.1 Precautions before usage electronic equipments.

Recycling of this product will help to conserve


natural resources and prevent potential negative
consequences for the environment and human
health caused by inappropriate waste handling.

WARNING
• EMC Statement - CS-7 is designed to provide rea-
sonable protection against harmful interference in a
typical medical installation. The personal computer
1.2.2 Precautions for usage
of CS-7 generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harm-
ful interference to other devices in the vicinity. How-
WARNING
ever, there is no guarantee that interference will not • Check the following additional information for imag-
occur in a particular installation. If CS-7 does cause es and patients and use in operation and treatment.
harmful interference to other devices, which can be –– The input patient information is correct.
determined by turning the equipment off and on, –– The input patient information has the intended
the user is encouraged to try to correct the interfer- result.
ence by one or more of the following measures: –– When patient information is acquired from other
–– Reorient or relocate the receiving device. devices, it is the patient in question.
–– Increase the separation between the equipment. –– The patient being examined matches the patient
–– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit
information shown on the display monitor.
different from that to which the other device(s)
–– When sending the image to the output device or
are connected.
media, the patient information is correct.
–– Consult the manufacturer or field service techni-
–– Before treatment, the image on the output device
cian for help.
or on the media matches the patient information.
–– The result is correct when image replacement
and supplemental information edit (image lateral-
CAUTION ity/patient orientation) is performed in the expo-
sure screen.
• Use this device outside of the patient environment.
• Image processing functions are used by qualified
• This device conforms with the METI guidelines to
persons with specialized knowledge of image diag-
reduce harmonic emissions caused by electrical and
nosis equipment and image processing. In addition,
electronic equipment for household and general use.
sufficiently confirm the results of image processing.
• The users (hospitals and clinics) hold responsibility
• Do not perform diagnosis with the images displayed
for the usage and maintenance of this device. Do
not use this device unless you are a physician or on this device.
certified person under law. • Risk of misidentification of patients may occur if
• Before using this device, confirm that this device is modifications to patient information for examina-
operating normally. tions or examination information acquired from a
• When a problem occurs with this device, turn the higher system such as a Radiology Information
power off, attach an appropriate sign, such as System (RIS) are made. When the information is
"malfunction", on this device, and contact Konica modified, notify the system administrator of the
Minolta technical representatives. modification without delay, and in addition, make
• This device is not explosion-proof, so do not use sure that the patient information and/or examination
any flammable or explosive gas near this device. information are correctly modified on output devices
• For the basic operation of the personal computer, such as PACS to which this device sent the image
display monitor, and optional parts for this device, information and examination information.
refer to their operation manuals. • Konica Minolta will not be liable for the loss of im-
• Please follow the rules and regulations of your rel- portant data such as patient information arising
evant authorities in the disposal of this product, ac- from the introduction of this system. Important data
cessories, options, consumables, media and their require separate assurance of security, backup, etc.
packing materials.

17
1.2 Safety precautions

WARNING CAUTION
• When lightning is likely to occur, stop work and • Take the following precautions when performing ex-
unplug the power plug from the wall outlet. When it posure using this device.
thunders before unplugging the power plug do not –– Check whether or not the patient needs extra
touch the device, including any of the cables. Doing care before performing exposure.
so may cause a fire or electric shock. –– Check the patient information before performing
• If there is any smoke, odor, or abnormal sound, it exposure.
may cause a fire if use is continued, so immediately • Turn the power off after finishing the work to main-
turn the power switch off, unplug the power plug tain stable operation. If the power to the system is
from the wall outlet, and contact Konica Minolta kept on continuously for 24 hours out of necessity,
technical representatives.
turn the power off and on once a week.
• Take the following precautions when using this de-
• To use functions that share image data, integrate the
vice and software.
pending reason and other settings for this device.
–– Konica Minolta or a contractor designated by
• Use with suitable settings for image processing pa-
Konica Minolta will install the software of this de-
rameters. To use functions that share image data,
vice.
set the same values for the image processing pa-
–– Do not disassemble or modify this device.
–– Do not connect any devices that were not pur- rameters of this device.
chased from Konica Minolta. • Do not use devices that emit electromagnetic
–– Do not install software purchased from other waves such as mobile phones, PHS, or pocket
companies. pagers near this device.
–– Do not uninstall software that has already been • Do not use continuously for extended periods of
installed. time. If you need to use the device continuously for
–– Take precautions to prevent infection from com- extended periods, take a 10 to 15 minute break ev-
puter viruses. ery hour to give your eyes and hands a break.
–– Do not change the setting for the OS (operating • Take note of the reception status for radios and
system), or delete folders or files. TVs near this device, since interference may occur
–– Do not operate Windows Explorer unless speci- in them when this device is in use.
fied. • Check the touch positions on the touch panel when
–– Do not use the DVD drive for other purposes. starting this device, turning on the display monitor,
–– Confirm that the hard disk access lamp is out or unplugging and plugging in the USB cable, etc.
before removing disks. When the touch position and the cursor position
–– Do not turn the power switch off or pull out the are out of sync, or the cursor does not move even
power cable while the system is operating. when touched, leave it for about two minutes, or
• Take note of the following to reduce the risk of fire,
check the USB cable connections and restart this
electric shock, or electrical leakage:
device and the display monitor.
–– Always use the specified cables such as a pow-
• Be sure to check the image orientation of images
er cable.
received from medical imaging devices (CR and
–– Use wall outlet with the correct rating as a power
DR).
source.
• Shut down this device after confirming that the
–– Connect the power plug to the wall outlet prop-
erly without any slack. hard disk access lamp is out. Also, when turning on
–– Use a power source with a ground wire. again, do so after 10 seconds have elapsed.
–– If you do not plan to use this device for an ex-
tended period of time, unplug the power plug.
–– The supplied power cable is dedicated for this
device, so do not use it elsewhere.
–– Avoid exposure to liquids such as water.
–– Make sure that foreign material, such as pieces
of metal or wires, does not get inside.
–– Do not handle the power plug with wet hands.
–– Do not let dirt or dust adhere to the power plug.
–– Do not use extension cables.
–– Do not place many loads on a single electrical
outlet.
–– Do not damage the power cable. Also, do not
use damaged cables.
–– Do not block the ventilating openings.

18
1.2 Safety precautions

1.2.3 Precautions for install- 1.2.4 Precautions regarding care


ing, moving, and storing and maintenance of this device

Chapter 1
WARNING WARNING
• Take the following precautions when moving this • Do not remove the lithium batteries.
device. • Turn the power off and remove the power plug from
–– Do not subject to shock or vibration. the wall outlet.
–– Do not start moving until the power is turned off,
and operation has stopped completely.
–– Do not move with the power cable or any other
CAUTION
cable connected.
• Perform the maintenance and inspection periodi-
cally. Also, contact Konica Minolta technical repre-
sentatives for cleaning of the inside.
CAUTION • Immediately after turning the power off, be careful
• Contact Konica Minolta or dealers specified by of hot components inside this device.
Konica Minolta to install or move this device. • Install the power cable, interface cable, etc.
• Take note of the following when installing or storing securely.
this device. • Do not rub or strike this device with hard objects as
–– Do not install or store in a location where it may it will cause damage.
be adversely affected by atmospheric pressure,
temperature, humidity, ventilation, sunlight, dust,
salt-air, or air containing sulfur.
–– Do not install or store in a location where it is not
stable, ventilation is insufficient, the difference
in light-dark is great, electromagnetic waves are
generated, or where subjected to vibration or
shock.
–– Do not install or store in a location where chemi-
cal agents are used or stored.
–– Do not lay this device on its back, upside down
or directly on the floor.
–– Do not connect or disconnect the interface cable
while the power cable is connected.
–– Do not use an interface cable other than the
specified one.
–– Do not damage the interface cable. Also, do not
use damaged interface cables.
–– Do not leave packing materials around.
–– Do not subject this device to strong shocks or
vibration by dropping it, etc.

19
1.2 Safety precautions

1.2.5 Precautions regarding 1.2.6 Precautions regarding


CD/DVD use display monitor use

WARNING WARNING
• The optical head of the CD/DVD device discharges • If the LCD monitor shows the same image for ex-
a laser, so take care not to look in the object lens of tended periods of time, it will burn onto the screen.
the optical head.

CAUTION
CAUTION • Use with screen brightness and contrast at a suit-
• Take the following precautions to prevent reading able level. Also, do not turn brightness up too high
errors etc. when using in a dark room.
–– Do not subject to impact. • The backlight for the LCD monitor will deteriorate
–– Do not touch disk surfaces. over time and will gradually grow darker. Check that
–– Place in cases when storing. the display monitor is at a suitable level of bright-
–– Do not place in locations with a lot of dust. ness before using this device.
–– Do not place in locations with high temperature • View more than 80 cm from the display monitor.
and high humidity. • Use in a bright room is recommended due to eye
–– Do not place in direct sunlight. fatigue being cumulative when used in a dark room.
• Attach labels to CD/DVD surfaces and cases so • When small dots of light and dark appear on the im-
that the recorded content can be identified. age in the LCD monitor, check whether it is a defect
• The types of media supported by this device are in the LCD monitor or the image information before
CD-R and DVD-R only. Also, please note that it is using.
possible that when saving on media other than the
following, writing errors or reading errors may oc-
cur. Please be forewarned.
–– Taiyo Yuden Co. CD-R <for data>
–– Taiyo Yuden Co. DVD-R 1-16 speed supported
<for data>
–– Mitsubishi Chemical Co. DVD-R 1-16 speed
supported <for data>
• If dust adheres to the object lens of the optical
head in the CD/DVD drive, it is possible that writ-
ing errors and reading errors may occur. In such
case, remove the dust with a commercial DVD lens
cleaner.

20
1.2 Safety precautions

1.2.7 Precautions for each CAUTION


function
Precautions on blackening process for areas

Chapter 1
outside the exposure field
WARNING • In the blackening process for areas outside the ex-
posure field, if the distance between the edge of the
Precautions on stitching combination processing X-ray exposure field and the edge of the cassette is
• Adjust the combination position by using the mark- 3 cm or less, the masking function may fail to recog-
ers as supplementary standards in addition to body nize the masking field. When using a collimator, set
parts of the subject. It is also recommended that the edge of the X-ray exposure field to be sufficient-
you arrange the measure in the combined image ly distant from the edge of the cassette. In addition,
part during exposure to simplify the confirmation of use preview on the [Output] tab or [Overlay] tab to
the combined parts. check that the masking area is appropriately set
before the image is output, and modify the masking
Precautions on magnetic card reader area on the viewer screen if needed.
• Check that patient information read from a mag-
netic card is consistent with the information written Notes on the chest wall blackening process
in the magnetic card. • Recognition of unexposed areas on the breast
• Do not connect multiple magnetic card readers to a may be lost in the chest wall blackening process.
single device. It may cause malfunctions. Use preview on the [Output] tab or [Overlay] tab to
• Do not change the settings of the dip switch on the check that the chest wall blackening area is not in
bottom of the magnetic card reader. the diagnosis area before the image is output, and
set the chest wall blackening process to OFF on
Precautions on bar code reader the viewer screen if needed.
• The reading window discharges a laser, so take
care not to look in the laser or point the laser to- Precautions on mammogram
ward the eye. In addition, perform periodic inspec- • Use upon confirming that missing regions in images
tion of the reading window. on the reception area and exposure field exceeding
• Laser is discharged during disassembly. Do not dis- the reception area are within the allowable range.
assemble. Also, make sure that additional information such as
stamps do not overlap with the breast area in im-
Precautions for image measurements ages.
• Sometimes the exposure orientation causes ac- • Confirm that additional information such as mark-
cidental errors with regard to the actual length of ers and stamps is not superimposed on the breast
the subject. Use while taking into account any error area.
between image and measured results. • When displaying two mammograms on two frames,
fine-tune and check the horizontal positions of the
Precautions when running HS processing
images.
• When running HS processing, the images may
seem strange. For applications with this process- Precautions for the use of the highlight func-
ing, always check whether images are suitable for tion for the tube/gauze
diagnosis. • If the tube/gauze is difficult to identify on the image,
• The noise is reduced by HS processing, and you can adjust the highlight level. When the tube/gauze is
expect signals that are unclear due to noise to become highlighted too much, lower the highlight level.
clearer, but signals that do not exist will not be visible.
Precautions on multi-study function
• When reviewing whether to reduce dosage by means
• Take extra care not to make any incomplete input
of HS processing, consider lowering the signal com-
or input error during the input of patient information
ponent by means of reducing dosage and always
because the examinations for different patients may
check whether images are suitable for diagnosis.
be treated as examinations for same patient, or the
Precautions on a stitching cassette examination information may be assigned to differ-
• There are small differences in magnification of im- ent patient due to incomplete input or input error of
ages made with REGIUS plates which are adjacent the patient information. Note that the examination
within a stitching cassette. For this reason, over- for the emergency patient with same ID will be uni-
lapping parts of images made with REGIUS plates fied when the emergency patient function is used.
which are adjacent do not completely match. (When
the exposure distance is 1.5 m, misalignment in the
horizontal direction will be approximately 0.5 mm at
maximum.)

21
1.2 Safety precautions

CAUTION CAUTION

Precautions on REGIUS plates Precautions for exposure with the AeroDR De-
• Frequency and duration of use of the REGIUS tector
plates* are automatically monitored when they are • Before exposure, confirm on the screen of this
scanned by the reader. The replacement schedule device that the AeroDR Detector is registered in
may not be properly managed if the plate is not the exposure room. Also, perform exposure after
used for an extended period of time. Therefore, use confirming that the AeroDR Detector to be used for
of the REGIUS plates as evenly as possible is rec- exposure has been selected.
ommended. (* Photostimulable phosphor plate for • Do not leave the AeroDR Detector in the vicinity of
Konica Minolta computed radiography) a heating device such as a heated carpet etc.
Precautions when changing the exposure device Precaution on exposure dose
• When changing the device (for example, a wall • After exposure, S values are displayed in the im-
stand reader to a table reader), a different exposure age display areas of this device. Check that the S
conditions may have been set for the same body values indicate the appropriate dosage for exposed
part depending on the settings of the body part that images.
is created or edited by the user master. Therefore,
carefully check both the body part and its exposure
Precautions when performing exposure in Aero
conditions before starting the examination.
Sync mode
• Confirm that the device is ready for exposure
Precautions when the image is used on a de- through its display before performing exposure.
vice other than the one used for output • Confirm that a confirmation is sounded from the de-
• When using the image on another device for the vice after the start of exposure.
purpose of measurement etc., check the consis- • Do not let the AeroDR Detector vibrate or receive
tency between the devices before use. In particular, shock until the preview image is displayed.
care must be taken when decreasing the image • Confirm that the AeroDR Detector's battery level is
size because some correction may be applied to full before performing exposure.
the image depending on the reduction ratio. • Use within the range of the pre-checked exposure
conditions.
Precautions on changing the reading area
• If annotation has been set for the image, changing
the reading area will disable the annotation setting.
Set annotation again.

Precautions when sending exposure informa-


tion
• When sending exposure information to an external
X-ray device, check the exposure conditions on the
X-ray device. Be especially careful of X-ray expo-
sure conditions when performing an exposure on a
small child.

Precautions on the login control mode


• Be careful of password management.

Precautions when delivering an image from


this device to other devices
• Confirm that additional information such as set an-
notation is correct.

Precautions on the grid


• For grid during exposure, use 34-40 lp/cm. When
exposing with a grid other than specified, some-
times moire cannot be eliminated.
* For the AeroDR Detector, the grid to be used is
specified. Refer to the AeroDR SYSTEM Opera-
tion Manual for details.

22
Chapter
2
Product Overview
This chapter describes the overview of this device.

23
2.1 Overview of this device

This section describes the functions and system configuration example.

2.1.1 Functions

This device is a DIRECT DIGITIZER used with an image diagnosis device, medical imaging device and image stor-
age device connected via the network.
This device digitally processes patient images collected by the medical imaging device to provide image and patient
information.

2.1.2 System configuration example

The system configuration example is as shown below.

X-Ray device operation panel

X-Ray Exposure
Electronic Medical information
Records
FTP
DICOM Print

Printer
CS-7

DICOM MWM
DICOM Storage
HIS/RIS

DICOM MPPS
(1) Order Information
(2) Image Information PACS
JPEG (HOST)
(3) Patient Information DICOM PDI

DICOM
Image Data
DICOM G/W

Media

AeroDR
Detector

REGIUS

* This device is intended to be connected to AeroDR Detector or to REGIUS as an input device, and to printer or
PACS as an output device.
* For details on how to use AeroDR Detector and REGIUS, refer to their respective operation manuals.
* 4 AeroDR Detectors can be connected to this device.
* 15 REGIUS series can be connected to this device.

24
Chapter
3
Description of Each Screen
This chapter describes the screen structure of this device,
and the function of each button on the screen, etc.

25
3.1 Screen connections

The following describes the connection between various screens and how they transition. For details, see the corre-
sponding page in the manual for each screen.
Meaning of the arrows
:Screen transition operation
OO Initial screen :Operation that returns to
the previous screen
Patient registration screen List screen
OO System monitor screen

Press [System]. Network Status

Press [Close].
The initial screen to be displayed will be either the patient
registration screen or the list screen. The patient registra-
tion screen and the list screen are switched by selecting
tabs.
Exposure Room
Press [Perform].

Press [Back].

OO Body part selection screen

Warranty Component
Press
[System].

Press [Close].
This is the screen to select an
exposure body part.
This is the screen to confirm the
Press [Perform]. status of this device and the devices
connected to it. It is also where you
can perform exposure room switching
and the confirmation of replacement
Press [Exam.Tag]. period of regular replacement parts.
Each screen is switched using tabs.

OO Exposure screen
OO Viewer screen
Press [ ] or
[ ].

Press [Tool].
This is the screen for exposing
and adjusting the exposed im- This is the screen for fine adjustment
age. By switching the control of the exposed image. More detailed
panel, various operations can be Press [Return]. image adjustment can be performed
performed. than the exposure screen.

26
3.2 Patient registration screen

3.2.1 Structure of patient registration screen

This is the screen for inputting the patient information. The patient registration screen is displayed when the [Patien-
tReg.] tab is selected from the main tabs.

(1)
(2)
(4)
(3)

Chapter 3
(5)

(6)

(7)
(8)

Number Name Functions


Date and time, operator name, exposure room name, icons of devices
(1) Application bar
connected to this device are displayed.
There are 2 types: main tab (large) and sub tab (small). Up to 1-3 main
tabs can be displayed.
[PatientReg.], [OrderList], and [Completed] main tabs are the initial setting.
(2) Sorting tab Sub tabs can be created without limitations. Sub tab displays the tab
name, symbol mark, and number of examinations. When all tabs can-
not be displayed within the screen, tab scroll buttons [ ] are
displayed.
This is the area to input patient information. Some items require input with
(3) Input item area
the input panel (keyboard).
Pressing [ ] displays the next patient information, and pressing [ ]
(4) Scroll button
displays the previous patient information.
(5) Clear button The input patient information disappears.
(6) Search button Search begins with the input patient information.
Display/hide button
(7) Displays or hides the input panel display.
(Input panel)
[System]: The system monitor screen is displayed. When an error occurs
in this device or in devices connected to it, the button changes
(8) Tool bar area
color.
[Perform]: Runs the examination of the selected patient.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Creating too many tabs makes it difficult to find the target tab and lowers the operability. Do not add more tabs than neces-
sary.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

27
3.2 Patient registration screen

3.2.2 Details of application bar

The device information display area of the application bar displays the device icons as well as the state (battery level
and signal strength) of the AeroDR Detectors registered in the exposure room.

Signal strength
Battery level
Device icon

When an image display area has focus, a frame is displayed around the device information that corresponds to the
image display area.

Frame indicating focus

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When there is a problem with connection or when the power is turned off, the device icon is displayed in gray.
• When the image could not be received after exposure due to communication error, etc., the device icon is displayed with a
yellow border.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •• • • •

OO Device icon display OO AeroDR Detector battery level display


Icon Device name Status
Battery level
Low High

Wall stand reader Not being


charged

Table reader Charg-


ing

Color
AeroDR Detector of icon
Red Yellow Green

AeroDR Stitching Unit

OO AeroDR Detector signal strength display


Wireless condition Wired .
Out of range Bad Good connection

28
3.2 Patient registration screen

Application bar when using the portable X-ray device


When this device is operated with the portable X-ray device, the network connection status, etc. are displayed on the
application bar.
Signal strength

Network name
Battery level
Device icon

OO Battery level display of this device. OO Signal status display of this device .
(when using the portable X-ray device) (when using the portable X-ray device)
Battery level Wireless condition

Chapter 3
Out of
Status Low High range Bad Good

Not being
Icon
charged

Charg-
Color of icon — Red Yellow Green
ing
Color
Red Yellow Green
of icon

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• If the battery charge drops to 5% or less, the system may enter a sleep state. If the battery icon turns red or the message
that the battery level is low appears, please charge this device.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •• • • •

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The network name displayed when operating this device with the portable X-ray device is set during installation.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •• • • •

29
3.3 List screen

This is the screen where a list of examinations is displayed. When tabs other than the [PatientReg.] tab are selected
on the sorting tab, the screen is always the list screen.

(1)
(2)
(7)
(3)
(8)
(4)

(5) (9)

(6)

Number Name Functions


Date and time, operator name, exposure room name, icons of devices
(1) Application bar
connected to this device are displayed.
There are 2 types: main tab (large) and sub tab (small). Up to 1-3 main
tabs can be displayed.
[PatientReg.], [OrderList], and [Completed] main tabs are the initial setting.
(2) Sorting tab Sub tabs can be created without limitations. Sub tab displays the tab
name, symbol mark, and number of examinations. When all tabs can-
not be displayed within the screen, tab scroll buttons [ ] are
displayed.
(3) List display area Examinations registered on each sorting tab are displayed.
Keyword input column for refined display for the patient displayed in the
(4) Filter items
tab.
Item names of examination information. Press [ ] displaying the
item names, and lists can be sorted with the item names.
(5) Display item
[ ] means ascending order and [ ] means descending order. Com-
binations of up to 3 items can be specified for sorting.
Examinations registered with the tab are displayed. Focus is displayed in
(6) Examination
selected examinations.
(7) Filter button Refined display with input keywords for filtered items.
(8) Clear button The input keyword for filtered items disappears.
Drag the scroll bar to scroll a list up and down. Pressing [ ] scrolls
(9) Scroll bar/scroll buttons
the screen by line, and pressing [ ] scrolls by page.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Creating too many tabs makes it difficult to find the target tab and lowers the operability. Do not add more tabs than neces-
sary.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

30
3.3 List screen

(10)

(11)

Chapter 3
(12)
(13)

(14)

Number Name Functions


Display/hide button
(10) Displays or hides the examination information display area.
(Examination information display area)
The tab is displayed when the examination information display area is
(11) Patient/Exam.Info tab
displayed.
(12) Examination information display area The details of the examination are displayed.
Drag the scroll bar to scroll a list left and right. Pressing [ ]
(13) Scroll bar/scroll buttons
scrolls the screen by frame, and pressing [ ] scrolls by page.
The operation button is displayed for a focused examination.
[System]: The system monitor screen is displayed. When an error oc-
curs in this device or in devices connected to it, the button
changes color.
[Delete]: Deletes the selected examination.
[Modify]: Displays the information modification screen for the selected
(14) Tool bar area examination.
[Refer]: Displays the examination history of the selected examination.
[Append]: Adds the exposure conditions to the completed examinations.
[Refresh]: When connected to a higher system, refreshes lists.
[Guard]: Disables deletion of the selected examination. Press again and
protection is canceled.
[Perform]: Performs the selected examination.

31
3.4 Body part selection screen

This is the screen to select the body part.


(1)
(2)
(3)

(6)

(7)
(4)

(5) (8)

Number Name Functions


Date and time, operator name, exposure room name, icons of devices
(1) Application bar
connected to this device are displayed.
Patient name, patient ID, date of birth, and sex, etc. are displayed.
The emergency mark is displayed for emergency patients, and the med-
(2) Patient information display area
ical warning mark is displayed for pregnant patients or other patients
who need extra care during X-ray exposure.
When the set tab is selected, body part is displayed in the body part
(3) Favorite tab
display area linked to the selected tab.
The exposure body part is displayed. With a maximum of 2 pages, each
(4) Body part display area
page can display up to 8 buttons at the same time.
Switching button
(5) Switches the pages of the button display area. Maximum is 2 pages.
(Button display)
(6) Set key display area Set key for the selected body part is displayed.
(7) Set key This is the button to determine exposure conditions for the body part.
Switching button When there are multiple pages for the set key display area, move pages
(8)
(Set key display area) by pressing [ ] or [ ].

32
3.4 Body part selection screen

(11)

Chapter 3
(9)
(12)
(10)

(13)

Number Name Functions


(9) Exposure conditions display area Exposure conditions added by pressing set keys are displayed.
(10) Exposure conditions Exposure conditions and device icon are displayed.
(11) Delete button Deletes the selected exposure conditions (focused exposure conditions).
Drag the scroll bar to scroll the exposure conditions display area left and
(12) Scroll bar/scroll buttons right. Pressing [ ] scrolls the exposure body part list by frame,
and pressing [ ] scrolls pages.
During registration in the exposure conditions display area, operation but-
tons are displayed for the focused examination.
[System]: The system monitor screen is displayed. When an error occurs
in this device or in devices connected to it, the button changes
color.
(13) Tool bar area
[Schedule]: Reserves the selected exposure conditions (focused expo-
sure conditions). Pressing [Schedule] reserves the examina-
tion and displays the list screen.
[Back]: Displays the list screen without reserving the examination.
[Perform]: The exposure screen is displayed.

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When exposed, the exposed image thumbnails and exposure conditions are displayed in the exposure conditions display
area.
• [Schedule] is not displayed in the tool bar area when the body part selection screen is displayed from the exposure screen.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

33
3.5 Exposure screen

This is the screen to perform exposure.

3.5.1 Structure of the exposure screen

The exposure screen consists of several areas. Here, each area is described.
(1)
(2)

(4)
(3)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

Number Name Functions


Date and time, operator name, exposure room name, icons of devices
(1) Application bar
connected to this device are displayed.
Patient name, patient ID, date of birth, sex, etc. are displayed.
The emergency mark is displayed for emergency patients, and the medi-
cal warning mark is displayed for pregnant patients or other patients who
(2) Patient information display area need extra care during X-ray exposure.
[ ]: The patient information editing screen is displayed ([ ] is not
displayed when exposing with the multi-study).
The order list or body part selection is displayed. The displayed details
(3) Examination display area
can be switched with tabs.
Displays exposure conditions and exposed images, etc. The displayed
(4) Work area
details can be switched with tabs.
Drag the scroll bar to scroll the work area left and right.
(5) Scroll bar/scroll buttons Pressing [ ] scrolls the screen by frame, and pressing [
] scrolls by page.
Used when performing some operation on the image display area that
has focus. The operation panel switches automatically depending on
(6) Control panel
the content in the image display area that has focus, and it can also be
switched by selecting tabs.
(7) Exam.Tag button Changes the exposure condition.
(8) Viewer button Displays the viewer screen.
(9) Lower control area Scroll the work area and change the body part to be imaged in this area.

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The patient information display area can be small-sized by setting. Emergency and medical warning marks are not displayed in
the small-sized area.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

34
3.5 Exposure screen

(10)

Chapter 3
(11)

(12)

(13)

Number Name Functions


(10) Display/hide button (Tool bar) Displays or hides the tool bar.
(11) Pause button Pauses the examination that has focus.
(12) Examination completion button Completes the examination and returns to the list screen.
[System]: The system monitor screen is displayed. When an error occurs in
this device or in devices connected to it, the button changes color.
(13) Tool bar area
[Additional]: Supplemental information edit screen is displayed.
[Logoff]: Logs off. Will appear only in login mode.

35
3.5 Exposure screen

3.5.2 Examination display area

In the display area, order lists and exposure conditions are displayed. Switching of displays is performed by selecting
tabs.

(1)
(2)

(3)

(4)

Number Name Functions


(1) Examination list Displays reserved exposure conditions.
(2) Output mark Check marks are displayed in the output image.
For exposure conditions, exposure body part, exposure method and flip/
(3) Exposure conditions
rotate status are displayed.
Switching button
(4) Scrolls through the displayed exposure conditions.
(Exposure conditions)

36
3.5 Exposure screen

3.5.3 Work area

In the work area, examination content (exposure conditions and exposed images) and previews when sent to the
host are displayed. Display of the examination content and the previews is switched by selecting tabs.

(3)

(1)

Chapter 3
(4)
(2)
(5)

Number Name Functions


Displays exposed images after exposure, or exposure information before exposure.
(1) Image display area When the [Queue Cont.] tab is selected, previews at the time of output
are displayed.
Displays flip mark, output format, and exposure conditions, etc. The
meaning of the icons are listed below.
: Not flipped
(2) Exposure conditions display area
: Flipped
: A format
: AB format
(3) Screen display format switching button Changes screen display format.
Outputs exposed images to the preset output destination. After output,
(4) Output button
the icon changes to [ ].
Sets an exposed image as blurred. After blurred setting, the icon chang-
(5) Discard button
es to [ ].

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The screen display format has a single-image format and a multiple-image format to display multiple screens in alignment. Sin-
gle-image format is suitable for checking details of the image. Multiple-image format is suitable for comparing multiple images.

1x1 display screen 2x2 display screen 3x2 display screen

•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

37
3.5 Exposure screen

3.5.4 Work area (not during exposure)

For work areas when unexposed, the type of exposure device, status, irradiation information, exposure conditions,
etc. are displayed.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

Number Name Functions


Status of the AeroDR Detector is displayed.
(1) Status
This is not displayed when exposing with the CR cassette.
The exposure device icon and the size of the AeroDR Detector is dis-
(2) Device icon
played.
(3) Exposure information The exposure information during the exposure is displayed.
(4) Exposure condition icon Exposure condition is displayed as an icon.
(5) Reading conditions Reading conditions are displayed.

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Displayed contents of the exposure information and exposure condition icon are different depending on the manufacturer
and model of the connected X-ray device.
• Display of the device icon changes according to the device status. The meanings of the status to be displayed are listed be-
low.

Exposure is enabled. The AeroDR Detector is not Error occurs while communi-
registered or the AeroDR cating, or system is not im-
Detector is loaded in the wall mediately available.
stand and table.
This icon is also displayed
when the AeroDR Detector
is turned off.

•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

38
3.5 Exposure screen

Output Output Overlay


3.5.5 Types of control panels (For host) (For printer) (For host)

On the control panel, adjustment items for exposure


and a screen to adjust exposed images are displayed.
Control panels basically switch automatically accord-
ing to the operation objective and circumstances, but
sometimes you need to switch them manually. The
types of control panels are as follows.

Chapter 3
Overlay
(For printer)

Exp.Info: Expo- Image Proc: Im- .


sure conditions age processing Acquisition

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• Control panels display up to 3 tabs. For tabs that are not
displayed, they can be displayed by pressing [ ]
displayed on the tab part to scroll.

. . Exp.Info: Irra-
Aero Sync QUICK diation results

•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

39
3.5 Exposure screen

3.5.6 Control panel (Exp.Info: Exposure conditions)

This is the control panel to perform setting of the X-ray device irradiation information (exposure conditions).

(1)
(2)

(3)

(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)

Number Name Functions


(1) X-ray tube device temperature Displays the temperature of X-ray tube.
Can switch between 2 point mode and 3 point mode.
(2) Mode According to the switching, the display of "mA", "mS", and "mAs" chang-
es.
(3) kV, mA, mS, mAs setting button Set the value of "kV", "mA", "mS", and "mAs" with [+] and [-] buttons.
(4) PATIENT SIZE Set the body type of patient.
(5) FOCUS Adjusts the size of focus area.
(6) AEC button Switches the mode of automatic exposure.
Adjust the dosage of radiation by pressing [+] and [-] buttons or moving
(7) DENSITY button
the slider.
Select from the menu.
(8) Filter selection button
The selection range varies according to the type.
(9) SID display Displays focal point - detector distance (cm).
(10) Collimator Height/Width adjustment buttons Adjusts the height and width of collimator respectively.

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Items and content displayed by control panels vary according to the device type and the maker of connected X-ray devices.
• The connected X-ray device exposure conditions will be displayed for every exposure conditions set key. The displayed ex-
posure conditions can be altered before exposure.
• X-ray exposure conditions can also be set from the operation panel of a connected X-ray device.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

40
3.5 Exposure screen

3.5.7 Control panel (Image Proc: Image processing)

This is the control panel to adjust images after exposure. Basic image adjustments such as change of S/G value, etc.
can be made.

(1)

(2)

(3)

Chapter 3
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)

(10)

Number Name Functions


Adjusts S value. Dragging the slider or pressing [ ] changes the
(1) S Value slider/button
S value by 1 level.
Adjusts G value. Dragging the slider or pressing [ ] changes the
(2) G Value slider/button
G value by 1 level.
Press [ROI] and ROI is displayed. Press again and it is released. Press
(3) ROI/ROI Adjustment buttons
[ROI Adjustment] and the viewer screen is displayed.
Changes the display method of the image that has focus.
[ZOOM+]: Switches to the zoom-in mode. Pressing it again cancels the
zoom-in mode.
Pressing the image in the zoom-in mode enlarges the display
1 step at a time.
[ZOOM-]: Switches to the zoom-out mode. Pressing it again cancels the
(4) ZOOM+/ZOOM-/FIT/Detail buttons zoom-out mode.
Pressing the image in the zoom-out mode reduces the display
1 step at a time.
[Fit]: Displays the enlarged (or reduced) image to fit in the frame size
(size of the image display area).
[Detail]: The viewer screen is displayed and the exposed image is dis-
played zoomed in.
Changes the display method of the image being displayed.
[Pan]: Switches to the pan mode. Press again and the pan mode is can-
celed.
(5) Pan/Rotate&Flip buttons
Dragging an image in the pan mode moves the image.
[Rotate&Flip]: Pressing the button displays a screen for rotating/flipping
an image.
(6) E process/F process/Hybrid/Tool buttons Performs the process when pressed.
(7) Text button The viewer screen is displayed. Place the annotation.
(8) Cropping button The viewer screen is displayed, so set the effective image area manually.
(9) Masking button The viewer screen is displayed, so set the masking area manually.
(10) Reset button Returns to the state when image was displayed.

41
3.5 Exposure screen

3.5.8 Control panel (Acquisition)

This is the control panel to perform setting of automatic read and reading conditions.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

Number Name Functions


Change the automatic read settings of the AeroDR Detector.
[Size/Pos.]: The reading size, reading direction, and reading position are
automatically set.
[Position]: The reading position is automatically set. Select the reading
size/direction using the Reading Size button/Reading Direction
(1) Automatic Reading button
button.
[OFF]: Turns the automatic reading settings off. Select the reading size/
direction/position using the Reading Size button/Reading Direc-
tion button/Reading Position button.
For CR cassettes, the resolution can be changed.
(2) Reading Size button Specify the reading size.
(3) Reading Direction button Specify the reading orientation (portrait/landscape).
(4) Reading Position button Specify the reading position.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• In the case of CR cassettes, "Standard" (175 μm) or "High" (87.5 μm) can be select-
ed. The resolution in the case of conditions key for mammograms is however 87.5 μm
for "Standard" and 43.75 μm for "High."

•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

42
3.5 Exposure screen

3.5.9 Control panel (Aero Sync)

When exposing via Aero Sync mode, use this control panel to perform various operations and configure various set-
tings.

(1)

Chapter 3
(2)

Number Name Functions


(1) X-ray detection level switching area Select the X-ray detection level during exposure.
Messages and buttons are displayed in this area depending on the opera-
tion status.
When the [AeroSync Button] is ON on the [Exposure Room] tab on
the system monitor screen
Exposure permission waiting screen
The device is waiting for permission for exposure. The screen
changes to the ready-to-expose screen if you press [AeroSync].
Ready-to-expose screen
The screen is locked as it is ready to be captured. To cancel
exposure, press [Cancel], then the screen returns to the expo-
(2) Message/Button area sure permission waiting screen.
When the [AeroSync Button] is OFF on the [Exposure Room] tab on
the system monitor screen
Ready-to-expose screen
The screen is locked as it is ready to be captured. To suspend
exposure, press [Pause], then the screen returns to the exposure
permission waiting screen.
Exposure resumption waiting screen
The device is waiting for exposure to be resumed. The screen
changes to the ready-to-expose screen if you press [Restart].

43
3.5 Exposure screen

3.5.10 Control panel (QUICK)

This is the control panel for performing image adjustments in operation with the AeroDR Portable RF/UF Unit.
The button types and layout can be customized according to which functions you use.

(1)

(2)

(3)

Number Name Functions


Adjusts S value. Dragging the slider or pressing [ ] changes the
(1) S Value slider/button
S value by 1 level.
Adjusts G value. Dragging the slider or pressing [ ] changes the
(2) G Value slider/button
G value by 1 level.
Select a button from among [Zoom+], [Zoom-], [Pan], [Fit], [ROI], [Text],
[ROI Adjustment], [Rotate&Flip], [E Process], [F Process], [H Process],
[Tool], [Masking], [Cropping], [Contrast Invert] and [Tube/Gauze] dis-
(3) Custom area played depending on the setting to display each function. The button
types and layout can be customized according to which functions you
use.
[Contrast Invert]: Reverses black and white on the output image.

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The [Contrast Invert] function is only available in the [QUICK] tab.
• Contrast invert is a function for checking the image on the screen. It has no effect on the output.
• The S Value slider/button and G Value slider/button are always displayed.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

44
3.5 Exposure screen

3.5.11 Control panel (Exp.Info: Irradiation results)

This is the control panel to perform setting of the X-ray device irradiation information (irradiation results).

(1)

Chapter 3
(2)

Number Name Functions


(1) Irradiation result value Displays irradiation result value.
(2) Numerical keypad Numerical keypad for inputting result values.

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• If irradiation results could not be acquired from the X-ray device, the values are not displayed.
• Use this control panel when resetting of irradiation results is necessary after exposure.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

45
3.5 Exposure screen

3.5.12 Control panel (Output - for host)

This is the control panel to perform setting of host output conditions.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)
(6)

Number Name Functions


(1) Host/Printer switch button Switches output conditions for host and for printer.
(2) TrimmingSize button Select the trimming size.
(3) Direction button Switches the orientation between portrait and landscape when trimming.
Adjusts size of trimming frame. Each time you press each button for the
(4) Size adjustment button
width and height, the size of the trimming frame changes.
Displays a preview image in which the set output conditions are reflect-
(5) Preview button
ed.
Returns to the state when image was displayed. Only trimming size is
(6) Reset button
reset.

46
3.5 Exposure screen

3.5.13 Control panel (Output - for printer)

This is the control panel to perform setting of printer output conditions.

(1)
(2)

(3)
(4)

Chapter 3
(5)
(6)

(7)
(8)
(9)

Number Name Functions


(1) Host/Printer switch button Switches output conditions for host and for printer.
Press this button when sending the same output conditions set for printer
(2) Host also send the same size
for host.
(3) Format button Select the format for output. Select from A format and AB format.
(4) Film Size button Select the film size.
(5) Direction button Switches the orientation between portrait and landscape when outputting.
Set the number of output with [+] and [-]. It can be set in the range from 1
(6) Number
to 9.
(7) Output Type button Select the output type.
Returns to the state when image was displayed. Film Size and number of
(8) Reset button
sheets are reset.
(9) Preview button Displays a preview image in which the set output conditions are reflected.

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• If [Reset] is pressed while pressing [Host also send the same size], the image (trimming size) to be sent by the host is also
reset.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

47
3.5 Exposure screen

3.5.14 Control panel (Overlay - for host)

This is the control panel to perform setting of host overlay.

(1)

(2)

(3)
(4)

(5)
(6)

(7)
(8)

(9)
(10)

Number Name Functions


(1) Host/Printer switch button Switches overlay for host and for printer.
Press this button when sending the same overlay conditions set for host
(2) Same settings for host and printer to printer. Not displayed when the printer is not registered as the output
device.
(3) Marker 1 selection button Set the marker to display.
(4) Marker 1 position button Set the position of the marker to display.
(5) Marker 2 selection button Set the marker to display.
(6) Marker 2 position button Set the position of the marker to display.
(7) Stamp selection button Set the stamp to display.
(8) Stamp position button Set the position of the stamp to display.
(9) Scale selection button Select type of scale or grid.
(10) Preview button Displays a preview image in which the set overlay content is reflected.

48
3.5 Exposure screen

3.5.15 Control panel (Overlay - for printer)

This is the control panel to perform setting of printer overlay.

(1)

(2)

(3)
(4)

(5)

Chapter 3
(6)

(7)
(8)

(9)
(10)

Number Name Functions


(1) Host/Printer switch button Switches overlay for host and for printer.
Press this button when sending the same overlay conditions set for print-
(2) Same settings for host and printer er to host. Not displayed when the host is not registered as the output
device.
(3) Marker 1 selection button Set the marker to display.
(4) Marker 1 position button Set the position of the marker to display.
(5) Marker 2 selection button Set the marker to display.
(6) Marker 2 position button Set the position of the marker to display.
(7) Stamp selection button Set the stamp to display.
(8) Stamp position button Set the position of the stamp to display.
(9) Scale selection button Select type of scale or grid.
(10) Preview button Displays a preview image in which the set overlay content is reflected.

49
3.6 Viewer screen

This is the screen to perform image adjustment. More detailed image adjustment can be performed than the image
adjustment on the exposure screen.

(1)
(2)
(5)
(3) (6)

(4)

Number Name Functions


Date and time, operator name, exposure room name, icons of devices
(1) Application bar
connected to this device are displayed.
Patient name, patient ID, date of birth, and sex, etc. are displayed.
The emergency mark is displayed for emergency patients, and the medi-
(2) Patient information display area
cal warning mark is displayed for pregnant patients or other patients who
need extra care during X-ray exposure.
[Return]: Returns to the previous screen.
[S/G Value]: Adjusts S value and G value.
[ZOOM+]: Switches to the zoom-in mode. Pressing it again cancels the
zoom-in mode. Pressing the image in the zoom-in mode en-
larges the image 1 step at a time.
[ZOOM-]: Switches to the zoom-out mode. Pressing it again cancels the
zoom-out mode. Pressing the image in the zoom-out mode re-
duces the image 1 step at a time.
(3) Tool bar (1)
[Fit]: Displays the enlarged (or reduced) image to fit in the frame size (size
of the image display area).
[Pan]: Moves the image.
[Rotate&Flip]: Rotates/flips the image.
[RemoveGrid]: Performs grid removal.
[Text]: Annotation is added/edited.
[ALL Reset]: Resets all operations and restores the system to the status
in which the image was displayed.
(4) Image display area Images to adjust are displayed.
(5) Tool bar tab Switches various adjustment functions.
(6) Tool bar (2) Tools related to the selected tool bar tab are displayed.

50
3.7 System monitor screen

3.7.1 Network Status

This is the screen to confirm status of this device and machinery connected to this device.

(1)

(2)

Chapter 3
(3)

Number Name Functions


Switches between the [Network Status], [Exposure Room] and [Warranty
(1) Function switching tab
Component] tabs.
(2) Devices connected to this device Displays icons of device, etc. connected to this device.
Starts a utility or shuts down the system. This is displayed regardless of
tabs being selected.
[End]: Shuts down this device.
[Media]: The media output screen is displayed.
(3) System menu [Utility]: Starts utilities. This button is not displayed if the user authoriza-
tion of the logged in operator is "Technologist".
[Update]: Refreshes information.
[Close]: Exits the system monitor screen, and the previous screen is
displayed.

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Perform shutdown of this device on this screen.
• The display of the device icon changes as follows depending on the connection status.

Normal Normal Not connected


•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

51
3.7 System monitor screen

3.7.2 Exposure Room

This is the screen to perform confirmation of devices registered in the exposure room and to switch exposure rooms.

(1)
(2)
(6)
(3)
(7)

(8)

(4)

(5)
(9)
(10)

Number Name Functions


(1) Function switching tab Switches between the [Network Status], [Exposure Room] and [Warranty Component] tabs.
Exposure room displays a maximum 4 rooms. When there are more than
(2) Exposure room display area
5 exposure rooms, scroll by pressing [ ] to display.
Device icons registered in the exposure room are displayed.
: Wall stand icon
(3) Devices registered in the exposure room : Table icon
: AeroDR Detector icon
: AeroDR Stitching System icon
Scroll button
(4) When there are more than 5 exposure rooms, press and scroll.
(Exposure room)
(5) Unused AeroDR Detector display area Information for an unused AeroDR Detector is displayed.
Switches the wireless communication of the AeroDR Detector between
prohibited and allowed.
(6) Wireless Prohibition button : This is displayed when the wireless communications allowed.
: This is displayed when the wireless communication is prohibited.
Displayed only in the Aero Sync mode.
(7) AeroSync button Sets whether or not the AeroSync button is to be operated when starting
examination or exposure. Turn this on when [M] or [L] is selected.
Displayed only in the Aero Sync mode.
(8) Initial detection level Sets the X-ray detection level at the time of starting examination or expo-
sure.
Drag the scroll bar to scroll an unused AeroDR Detector display area left
Scroll bar/scroll buttons
(9) and right. Pressing [ ] scrolls the screen by frame, and pressing
(Unused AeroDR Detector display area)
[ ] scrolls by page.
Starts a utility or shuts down the system. This is displayed regardless of
tabs being selected.
[Media]: The media output screen is displayed.
(10) System menu [Utility]: Starts utilities. This button is not displayed if the user authoriza-
tion of the logged in operator is "Technologist".
[Update]: Refreshes information.
[Close]: Exits the system monitor screen, and the previous screen is displayed.

52
3.7 System monitor screen

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• If the AeroSync button or initial detection level is set inappropriately, malfunction may be caused by a shock to the AeroDR
Detector. Be sure to press the AeroSync button after changing the button setting from OFF to ON.
• Be aware that the procedure for exposure must be changed in some cases when the settings are changed for the AeroSync
button or initial detection level. Be sure to press the AeroSync button after changing the button setting from OFF to ON.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Chapter 3

53
3.7 System monitor screen

3.7.3 Warranty Component

This is the screen to check type and status of regular replacement parts when the time for replacement comes.

(1)
(2) (4)

(5)
(3)

(6)

(7)

Number Name Functions


Switches between the [Network Status], [Exposure Room] and [Warranty
(1) Function switching tab
Component] tabs.
(2) Display selection menu Selects the type of replacement unit or replacement unit status.
(3) Replacement unit list Displays the reader name, replacement unit, and status.
ON/OFF switching button
(4) Switches the replacement notification function on/off.
(Replacement notification)
Displays the usage status and replacement estimation of the replacement
(5) Unit usage status display
unit chosen from the list.
Used by service engineers to edit the information about the replacement
(6) Edit button
unit. This button is not displayed in the log in mode.
Starts a utility or shuts down the system. This is displayed regardless of
tabs being selected.
[Media]: The media output screen is displayed.
[Utility]: Starts utilities. This button is not displayed if the user authoriza-
(7) System menu
tion of the logged in operator is "Technologist".
[Update]: Refreshes information.
[Close]: Exits the system monitor screen, and the previous screen is
displayed.

54
Chapter
4
General Operations
This chapter describes general operation methods of this device.

55
4.1 Input panel display

There are 2 types of input panel displayed on the screen, and you can input characters by pressing buttons. You can
input alphanumeric characters.

Display the input panel


Press [Switch input panel display].

Hide the input panel Display the input panel

The display switches every time [Switch input panel display] is pressed.

Input alphanumeric
Press [ABC] or [QWERTY].

[ABC] input panel [QWERTY] input panel

Letters are displayed in alphabetical order, or in the order on a keyboard.

56
4.2 Startup and shutdown

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
4.2.1 Startup of this device • When sharing a REGIUS among several units of this
device, start the unit with the JM installed first; after
Perform the following procedure when starting up this confirming startup of this unit, start the other units.
device. •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

1 Turn on the power for X-ray devices, etc. HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••


connected to this device. • The software version is displayed on the system
startup screen. Initialization will be completed a few
2 Press the power switch on this device. minutes after turning on the power.
• A progress bar is displayed on the system startup
screen, indicating the status of the system initialization
process.

Chapter 4
• Startup messages are displayed sequentially.
• Internal system initialization is performed while
the system startup screen is displayed.
• Upon completion of initialization, the initial
screen (patient registration screen or list screen)
is displayed, and this device is ready for opera- • During startup processing, if startup could not be
tion. completed for any reason, an error message will be
Patient registration screen displayed, and the system will transition to shutdown
processing.
• The patient registration screen will be displayed by
default. For the second startup and there after, the
screen displayed at the last shutdown will be dis-
played.
• In cases where a device like REGIUS is connected to
this device and the power is linked, when the power for
this device is turned on, the power for connected de-
vices is also turned on.
• The position of the power switch varies according to the
personal computer you are using. Refer to the product
operation manual for details.
List screen •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

57
4.2 Startup and shutdown

3 Press [OK].
4.2.2 Shutdown of this device

Perform the following procedure from the initial screen


when shutting down this device.

1 Press [System].

• The system monitor screen is displayed.

2 Press [End] on the system monitor screen.

• The shutdown screen will be displayed, and


shutdown processing of this device will be car-
ried out. After a short time, the power will be
automatically turned off.

4 Turn off the power for X-ray devices, etc.


connected to this device.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When turning the power of this device off, always fol-
low the above procedure. Do not turn off the power
with the power switch. Doing so may result in data
loss or damage to the system software.
• When sharing a REGIUS among several units of this
device, shut down all units connected to the JM before
turning off the power of the unit with the JM installed.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• In cases where a device like REGIUS is connected to
this device and the power is linked, when the power
for this device is turned off, the power for connected
devices is also turned off, or it shifts to sleep status.
• A confirmation screen is displayed. •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• To cancel the system shutdown, press [Cancel],
and then press [Close] on the system monitor
screen. Shutdown operation will be aborted and
the screen will return to the previous screen.

58
4.2 Startup and shutdown

4.2.3 Link to connected


devices
Startup and shutdown of devices connected to this de-
vice can be linked.
Devices that can be linked, and processing details are
as follows.

OO Connected devices and link details


Connected
Details to link
devices
The AeroDR Detector stops, linked to
AeroDR Detector
the shutdown processing of this device.
DRYPRO 793 starts up/shuts down,
DRYPRO 793 linked to the startup/shutdown process-
ing of this device.
REGIUS 110,
REGIUS 110 HQ, Each device recovers from sleep or
REGIUS 170, transitions to sleep, linked to the startup/
REGIUS 190, shutdown processing of this device.

Chapter 4
REGIUS 210
The specified devices start up/shut
Other devices,
down, linked to the startup/shutdown
JM
processing of this device.

59
4.3 Login control

4.3.1 Login screen 4.3.2 Login

It is possible to set a login screen that requires input of When using login mode, log in with the following pro-
user name and password when starting operations of cedure.
this device, or when resuming operations after return-
ing from screen saver.
1 Input user ID and password, then press
Login screen [Login].

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When the automatic login function is used, you are
automatically logged in when this device starts up and
the initial screen can be displayed.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

• The initial screen is displayed.

60
4.3 Login control

4.3.3 Logoff

Logoff is performed when switching users and so forth.


When the tool bar is displayed after pressing [ ], log
off with the following procedure.

1 Press [Logoff].

• Logging off.
• After logoff, the login screen is displayed.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• [Logoff] cannot be pressed until an image is acquired
from a reader device and the actual image is dis-
played.
• When [Logoff] is pressed during an examination, a

Chapter 4
message stating that the examination is paused is dis-
played. Press [OK] on the confirmation screen to log
off, pausing the examination.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• A confirmation screen is displayed.

2 Press [OK].

• Press [Cancel] to return to the previous screen.

61
4.3 Login control

2 Press the operator name to switch to it.


4.3.4 Switch of operators

When 2 or more operator names are registered, their


names can be switched. Operator names can be
switched only when the automatic login function is en-
abled.

1 Press [Operator] in the application bar.

• The operator names are switched.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• If the system configuration is made to send operator
information from a higher system, the operator cannot
be selected with this device.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• The operator name selection screen is dis- • When using certain settings, the login user name and
played. the operator name can be synchronized.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

62
4.3 Login control

4.3.5 Access right of operators

Available functions are limited depending on authorization level of the operator. Operation details for each authoriza-
tion are as follows.
: Can be operated
Authorization
Administrator Super user Technologist
Target screen and operation
System monitor screen
• Display or hide [Media] on the system menu.
  
System monitor screen
• Display or hide [End] on the system menu.
  
System monitor screen
• Hide [Utility] on the system menu.
 
User tool screen
• Enable "user management function" and "user log management" 
as user tools.

Chapter 4
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When logged in with the automatic login function, authorization becomes "Administrator".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

4.3.6 Operation history

Operation history of operators is recorded. The following contents will be recorded.


Recorded contents
Date when an event occurred Access right of the operator logged in when the event occurred

Time when the event occurred Event that occurred

User name logged in when the event occurred Details of the event

Operator name logged in when the event occurred -

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Operation history is available only for an operator with "Administrator" authorization.
• Refer, save, and delete can be performed with "user tool".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

63
4.4 Registration of the AeroDR Detector

When the AeroDR Detector is inserted into the AeroDR


Battery Charger, it is automatically registered.

1 Insert the AeroDR Detector into the Aero-


DR Battery Charger.
• The AeroDR Detector is registered.

2 Check registration of the AeroDR Detector


in the icon display of the application bar.

• When registered normally, the AeroDR Detector


icon is displayed in the application bar.

64
Chapter
5
Sequence of Examination
This chapter describes the operation steps
for examination procedures performed with this device.

65
5.1 Screen transition of examinations

The following describes the screen transition from examination registration to examination end and the typical opera-
tions performed in each screen.
Meaning of the arrows
: Screen transition operation
: Operation that returns to the previous
screen or an operation that can be omitted

(1) Initial screen


Patient registration screen List screen

Screens are switched


over by selecting tabs.

• New registration of patient information • Selection of examination


• Search registration
• Emergency registration

Press [Perform].

Press
[Back].

(2) Body part selection screen (4) Viewer screen

• Manual body part selec- • Change of S value/G value


tion • E/F/HS parameter adjustments
• Changing/deleting expo-
• Adjustment of ROI area
sure conditions
• Positioning/editing of annotation
Press [Perform].

Press Press [Return].


Press [Tool], etc.
[Exam.Tag].

(3) Exposure screen

Press [ ] or [ ].

* Pressing [ ] will
produce an output
to the host or printer
depending on the
settings.
• Exposure with AeroDR Detector/CR cassette
• Image adjustment

66
5.2 Flow of exposure with AeroDR Detector

The following describes the basic flow of exposure using the AeroDR Detector. See each item for detailed proce-
dures.

5.3  New registration of patient information……(1)

5.4  Selection of examination…… (2)

5.5  Exposure with AeroDR Detector……(3)

5.5.1 Manual body part selection… ………… (4)

5.5.2 Exposure of several body parts………… (5)

5.6  Image adjustment on the exposure screen…… (6)

Chapter 5
5.7  Examination completion and output……(7)

Number Task
(1) Perform a new patient registration in the patient registration screen.
(2) Select the examination target in the list screen.
(3) Perform exposure with the AeroDR Detector.
(4) Set the exposure body part and exposure condition.
(5) Perform exposure.
(6) Adjust the exposed images after exposure. Change the S value/G value, move the ROI area, etc.
When all exposures are finished, the examination is completed. Image is simultaneously and automatically output upon
(7)
examination completion. (depending on the settings)

67
5.3 New registration of patient information

New registration of patient information is performed 4 Input patient name, sex and date of birth.
with the patient registration screen. Select the • After each inputting item, press [Enter].
[PatientReg.] tab on the initial screen to display the pa- • If you press [Enter], the cursor will move to the
tient registration screen. next item.

1 Press the column for the patient ID. 5 Press [Perform].

2 Press the input panel, and input the patient ID.

• Registration is performed in the patient data-


3 Press [Enter]. base of this device, and the exposure screen or
the body part selection screen is displayed.

68
5.3 New registration of patient information

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Because input of "Sex", "Pregnancy" are displayed
with selection buttons instead of the input panel, press
the selection buttons.
• To input the [Institution Residence] or [Department],
press the appropriate selection button or directly input
the name of the institution residence or department.

• With the input item as a search key, search the patient


database for this device, or a higher system.
• When there is a patient ID that matches, name, sex
and age are displayed.
When there is no patient ID that matches, the cursor
moves to the following input field.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

Chapter 5

69
5.4 Selection of examination

When the examination is registered, it can be se- HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••


lected on the list screen. Select a tab other than the
• Before selecting the examination, press [Refresh],
[PatientReg.] tab on the initial screen to display the list
check if the list is the newest version available and
screen.
then select the examination.
• The exposure screen or the body part selection screen
1 Select the examination target. can be displayed by double-clicking the examination
target.
• If Patient ID is read by a barcode reader, examination
target can be selected. You can also transition to the
exposure screen at the same time the barcode is read,
depending on the setting.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• Focus is set on the examination.

2 Press [Perform].

• The exposure screen or the body part selection


screen is displayed.

70
5.5 Exposure with AeroDR Detector

5.5.1 Manual body part selec-


tion
When making advanced settings of exposure body
part and exposure method for each exposure, select
body part manually with the following procedure.

1 Select the tab.

• The set keys corresponding to the selected ex-


posure body part will be displayed.

3 Select a set key.

Chapter 5
• Linking to the selected tab, the exposure body
part available with the tab are displayed auto-
matically.

2 Select the exposure body part.


• The selected set key is added to the exposure
conditions list. By repeating from step 1, set
keys can be added.

71
5.5 Exposure with AeroDR Detector

4 When finished selecting/adding the set


5.5.2 Exposure of several
keys, press [Perform].
body parts
The following procedure is for exposure of several
body parts. Here, an example is described assuming
the following conditions.

Exposure device
• Wall stand x 1
• AeroDR Detector x 1
* Assume that the wall stand uses the AeroDR
UF Cable, and the AeroDR Detector is inserted
into the AeroDR Battery Charger.

Exposure conditions and order of exposure


(1) CHEST - Chest Erect -AP
(2) SPINE - L-Spine - AP
(3) HEAD - Skull - PA

The exposure sequence and the positions in which


exposure images are displayed are as shown be-
low.

(1) (2)

CHEST - Chest Erect - AP SPINE - L-Spine - AP

• The exposure screen is displayed. (3)

HEAD - Skull - PA
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When only reserving an examination, after adding
the set key, press [Schedule]. After reservation is per-
formed, the initial screen is displayed.
* The exposure sequence (1) - (3) is displayed for
• Returning to the initial screen by pressing [Schedule]
ease of explanation, and is not displayed on the
does not set study date and time of image supplemen-
actual screen.
tal information automatically.
• It is also possible to register multiple exposure methods
in 1 set key. Register these methods when installing. IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • • Always check the patient information and exposure
conditions before exposure.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

72
5.5 Exposure with AeroDR Detector

1 Remove the AeroDR Detector from the 2 Expose (1) when exposure is ready.
AeroDR Battery Charger, and insert it into • Configure the X-ray device settings and check
the wall stand. the exposure information before making an ex-
• In (1), "Panel not detected" is displayed until the posure.
AeroDR Detector is inserted into the wall stand.
Press the exposure switch of
the X-ray device
(1) (2)

(1) (2)
(3)

(3)

Insert the AeroDR Detector


into the wall stand

(1) (2)
• The exposed image is displayed in image dis-
play area (1), and the focus moves to (2).

3 Expose (2) when exposure is ready.

Chapter 5
(3) • Configure the X-ray device settings and check
the exposure information before making an ex-
posure.

Press the exposure switch of


the X-ray device

• Until the AeroDR Detector is inserted into the


wall stand and exposure becomes ready, "Pre-
paring" is displayed in image display area (1).
(1) (2)

(1) (2)

(3)

(3)

• The exposed image is displayed in image dis-


play area (2), and the focus moves to (3). At this
stage, because the AeroDR Detector is inserted
in the wall stand, exposure of (3) is not possible.
• When the AeroDR Detector inserted into the
wall stand is ready to start exposure, "Ready" is
displayed.

73
5.5 Exposure with AeroDR Detector

4 Remove the AeroDR Detector from the wall IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •


stand, and prepare for exposure with a stand- • When linked with the X-ray device, because the se-
alone AeroDR Detector. lected exposure conditions at the time of X-ray expo-
sure are linked to the irradiation results, always check
(1) (2) the exposure conditions before X-ray exposure.
• Depending on the type of X-ray device, several sec-
onds may elapse before notification of the irradiation
results. For this type of model, take care because
sometimes irradiation results are not reflected correct-
ly if the exposure conditions are changed immediately
(3) after X-ray irradiation.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• Linking to the insertion/removal of the AeroDR Detec-
• When the AeroDR Detector is removed from the tor into/from the wall stand, the icons inside the appli-
wall stand, "Preparing" is displayed in image dis- cation bar change as follows.
play area (3).

5 When exposure preparations are com- When the AeroDR When the AeroDR
plete, expose (3). Detector is inserted into Detector is removed
• Expose after "Ready" is displayed in image dis- the wall stand from the AeroDR
play area (3). Battery Charger
• Configure the X-ray device settings and check the
• Movement of focus for the image display area is linked
exposure information before making an exposure. to the state of insertion/removal of the AeroDR Detec-
tor into/from the wall stand.
(1) (2) • Exposure control can be performed with the AeroDR
Detector. After receiving exposure timing from X-ray,
when the interlock is released, the exposure switch can
be pressed. A warning sounds when the interlock can-
not be released (cannot press the exposure switch).
• X-ray exposure information is acquired automatically
(3) when linked to the X-ray device.
• The exposure field is automatically recognized, and
displayed on the screen as the effective image area. If
automatic recognition of the exposure field has failed,
set it manually by pressing [Cropping] in the [Image
Proc] tab.
• The exposure field automatic recognition function can
Press the exposure switch of
be set for each body part, and the fixed effective im-
the X-ray device
age area can be selected.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

(1) (2)

(3)

• The exposed image is displayed in image


display area (3). The focus remains on image
display area (3).

74
5.6 Image adjustment on the exposure screen

Performs adjustment of exposed images. Basic image HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••


adjustments such as S value/G value, position of ROI
• Change of S value/G value can also be performed on
area, etc. can be made on the exposure screen.
the viewer screen.
• The S value and G value are automatically adjusted to

5.6.1 Change of S value/G the appropriate values at the time of exposure. Adjust
them manually as required.
value • After selection of the image for image adjustment,
Change of S value/G value is performed with the fol- press the image once more to switch to the viewer
lowing procedure. screen. When more advanced image adjustment is
required, perform image adjustment on the viewer
screen where larger images are displayed.
1 Select the image for image adjustment. • The EI (Exposure Index) is calculated from the S
value at the time of exposure, then the deviation from
the predetermined target EI (Exposure Deviation) is
overlay-displayed.
Also, during host output, it is also output to the DICOM
tag.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Chapter 5
• The control panel automatically switches to the
[Image Proc] tab. If it does not switch, select the
[Image Proc] tab manually.

2 Adjust the image.

• Change numerical values by dragging the slider


or pressing [ ].

75
5.6 Image adjustment on the exposure screen

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
5.6.2 Change of parameters • In the case of a pneumoconiosis examination, a
warning message is displayed when parameters are
Change of the parameters is performed with the following changed.
procedure. •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
1 Select an image whose parameters you
• The parameter options available on the exposure
want to change.
screen are only ON and OFF. Perform detailed adjust-
ments on the viewer screen.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• The control panel automatically switches to the


[Image Proc] tab. If it does not switch, select the
[Image Proc] tab manually.

2 Press [E] or [F] you want to change.

• Images that were automatically altered by the E


process or F process are displayed.
• When [E] or [F] is pressed again, the original im-
ages are displayed.

76
5.6 Image adjustment on the exposure screen

5.6.3 Change of ROI area 3 Move the ROI area.

position
Change of ROI area position is performed with the fol-
lowing procedure.

1 Select an image whose ROI area you want


to change.

• When any part of the image is clicked, the ROI


area moves to the center of the clicked part.
• The following operations will cancel the ROI
mode.
– Pressing [ROI] again
– Pressing another button

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The control panel automatically switches to the • When ROI area movement is performed after chang-
[Image Proc] tab. If it does not switch, select the ing S value/G value, the changed S value/G value is
[Image Proc] tab manually. reset, and the S/G value becomes optimized after ROI
area movement.

Chapter 5
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
2 Press [ROI].
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• Perform detailed position change of ROI area on the
viewer screen.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• The ROI area is displayed.

77
5.6 Image adjustment on the exposure screen

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
5.6.4 Zooming in and out • Effects of resizing are not reflected at the time of out-
put.
Zoom in/out of exposed images is performed with the •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
following procedure.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• When a multi-touch monitor is used, zoom in/out can
1 Select an image to zoom in/out.
be performed with the following operations. In this case
[ZOOM+] or [ZOOM-] do not need to be pressed.

Zoom in
Simultaneously press 2 points with the thumb and in-
dex finger and spread the 2 points (spread the finger-
tips) to zoom in on the image.

• The control panel automatically switches to the


[Image Proc] tab. If it does not switch, select the
[Image Proc] tab manually.
Zoom out
Simultaneously press 2 points with the thumb and
2 Press [ZOOM+] or [ZOOM-]. index finger and move to close the 2 points (close the
fingertips) to zoom out on the image.

•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

3 Press any part of the image.

• Zooming in/out is displayed, centering on the


clicked part.
• Every time you press a part of the image, the
image is gradually zoomed in/out.
• If you focus on another image or perform any
other operations, the image will return to its
original size.

78
5.7 Examination completion and output

When all exposures are finished, end the examination IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •


and perform output.
• Always check the X-ray irradiation results before fin-
ishing the examination.
1 Press [ ]. • When the examination ends and no exposure images
exist, the examination itself is deleted. At this time, a
confirmation screen is displayed on whether to delete
the examination.

→ Press [OK] to delete the examination itself.


→ Press [Cancel] to return to the previous screen.
• When the examination is finished, exposed im- * A message "No images are captured. Cannot com-
ages are batch output to a preset output desti- plete study." may be displayed depending on the
nation. settings. In such cases, press the [Pause] button
or [Termination] button. Either of the two buttons is
displayed depending on the settings.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Chapter 5
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• If there is an unexposed image, a confirmation screen
is displayed.

• The initial screen is displayed. → Press [OK] to complete the examination by delet-
ing data for the unexposed portion and display the
initial screen.
→ Press [Cancel] to return to the previous screen.
• When outputting to a host, the output destination can
be switched between the predetermined host and a
backup host. Furthermore, when the output conditions
are different for each backup destination, recalculation
of output size is performed.
• Depending on the setting at the time of installation,
on the edge of the output film (the output image when
output to a host) a mark is added showing whether the
image is flipped or not.
: Flipped
: Not flipped
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

79
5.8 Flow of exposure with CR cassette

The following describes the flow of basic exposure using CR cassette. See each item for detailed procedures.

5.3  New registration of patient information……(1)

5.4  Selection of examination…… (2)

5.9  Exposure with CR cassette… ………(3)

5.5.1 Manual body part selection… ………… (4)

5.9.2 Exposure with bar code registration…… (5) 5.9.3 Exposure with specified reading sequence…… (6)

5.6  Image adjustment of the exposure screen……(7)

5.7  Examination completion and output……(8)

Number Task
(1) Perform a new patient registration in the patient registration screen.
(2) Select the examination target in the list screen.
(3) Perform exposure with the CR cassette.
(4) Set the exposure body part and exposure condition.
(5) Perform exposure with bar code registration. Perform bar code registration on the exposure screen.
(6) Perform exposure with a specified reading sequence. Specify the reading sequence on the exposure screen.
After exposure and reading the CR cassette with REGIUS, adjust the exposed image. Change the S value/G value,
(7)
move the ROI area, etc.
When all exposures are finished, the examination is completed. Image is simultaneously and automatically output upon
(8)
examination completion. (depending on the settings)

80
5.9 Exposure with CR cassette

For exposure when CR cassettes are used, there are


2 types, bar code registration and specified reading 5.9.2 Exposure with bar code
sequence. registration
When CR cassettes are managed with bar codes, per-
5.9.1 Registration methods of form exposure with the following procedure.
CR cassette
1 Place focus on exposure condition that
Registration of the CR cassette is performed on the the CR cassette is to be registered.
exposure screen with any of the exposure methods.

2 Read the bar code of the CR cassette

Chapter 5
with a bar code reader.

• The read bar code number is displayed in the


exposure conditions display area, and focus
moves to the next exposure condition. This com-
pletes the preparations for reading by REGIUS.

3 Perform exposure using the registered CR


cassette.
• Configure the X-ray device settings and check
the exposure information before making an ex-
posure.
Press the exposure switch of
the X-ray device

81
5.9 Exposure with CR cassette

4 Read CR cassette with REGIUS.


5.9.3 Exposure with specified
reading sequence
When exposing with the specified reading sequence,
perform exposure with the following procedure.

1 In the sequence to perform exposure, the


reading sequence is specified by pressing
the exposure conditions display area in
sequence.

• The image read from the CR cassette will be


displayed.
• When exposing several body parts, repeat from
step 1.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For bar code registration, the optional bar code reader
is required.
• The bar code reader is a CDRH class II laser product.
Operate it with caution on the following points.
– Do not look into the front reading window. There is • The first exposure is registered.
a danger that the laser will damage the eyes.
– Do not discharge the laser in the direction of
people's eyes. There is a danger that the laser will
damage the eyes.
• Sometimes the bar code cannot be read correctly
when the laser strikes it perpendicularly. If it cannot be
read correctly, tilt the bar code reader slightly and read
again.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• X-ray exposure information is acquired automatically
when linked to the X-ray device.
• When reading from the bar code of the CR cassette
that does not match the exposure conditions, a confir- • The second exposure is registered.
mation screen is displayed which says, "This cassette
is for general exposure. Check the Exam. Tag." Press
[OK], and register the correct CR cassette.
• CR cassettes with the same bar code cannot be reg-
istered consecutively. When there are several expo-
sures with CR cassettes with the same bar code, re-
register after reading the image with the REGIUS for
each exposure.
• By continually carrying out steps 1 and 2, the CR cas-
settes can be continually registered.
• Exposure with bar code registration is suitable when
this device is connected with multiple REGIUS series
devices.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
• The third exposure is registered.

82
5.9 Exposure with CR cassette

2 Perform exposure for the first image. HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••


• Configure the X-ray device settings and check
• X-ray exposure information is acquired automatically
the exposure information before making an ex-
posure. when linked to the X-ray device.
• The reading sequence can also be specified with the
Press the exposure switch of order list. With the reading sequence, press exposure
the X-ray device
conditions in order.

3 Read CR cassette with REGIUS.

• When pressing exposure conditions for examinations


whose reading sequence has been specified, the
reading sequence specification is canceled. When
several reading sequences are being specified, the
reading sequence after the deleted examination is
moved up.
• Exposure with specified reading sequence is suitable

Chapter 5
when this device is connected with 1 REGIUS.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• When the first image is displayed, the "First"


marker disappears, what was "Second" up to
that point changes its marker to "First", and what
was "Third" up to that point changes its marker
to "Second". (The numbers will move up in turn.)
• By continually carrying out steps 2 through 3,
the remaining exposures are performed and CR
cassettes are read.

• When all the exposures are finished and CR


cassettes are read, the numbers will disappear.

83
84
Chapter
6
Various Functions
This chapter describes various functions used for examination.

85
6.1 Function lists of the each screen

This chapter describes the functions of this device by every screen and by function type. A list of functions is as fol-
lows.

OO Functions of the patient registration screen


Search registration Emergency registration

OO Functions of the list screen


Display of details of exami- Display of examination his- Display of examinations
nation tory with refined search
Addition of exposure condi-
Modification of examination tions to completed exami-
Deletion of examinations
information nations

Protection of examinations - -

OO Functions of the body part selection screen


Change of exposure condi- Deletion of exposure condi- Change of order of expo-
tions tions sure conditions

OO Functions of the exposure screen


Change of order of expo- Discard (deletion of im- Cancellation of discard (de-
sures ages) letion of images)
Switching from the AeroDR Switching from the CR cas-
Change of exposure de-
Detector to the CR cas- sette to the AeroDR Detec-
vices
sette tor
Switching of AeroDR De- Edit of image supplemental
Status of devices
tectors information
Switch of screen display of Switch of screen display
Edit of patient information
the exposure screen format
Rotation and flip of the
Full-screen image display Panning of the image
display
Deletion of registration of
the CR cassette registered Hold of the examination Overlay
with a bar code
Highlight function for the Automatic 1x1 display func-
Image preview
tube/gauze tion

86
6.1 Function lists of the each screen

OO Functions of the viewer screen


Change of E/F/HS param- Change of the effective im-
Change of the ROI area
eters age area
Change of the masking How to remove the grid
Positioning of annotation
area again
Creating/editing of
Adjustment of annotation -
annotation characters

OO Output function
Change of host (electronic
Individual output Additional output medical record) output con-
ditions
Change of printer output
Printer output in A format Printer output in AB format
conditions
Sort of preview images Sort of preview images Sort of preview images
(each image) for host out- (each series) for host out- (transmitted) for host out-
put put put
Automatic output - -

OO Functions associated with X-ray irradiation information


Change of mammogram
Change of X-ray irradiation Replacement of X-ray irra-
image X-ray irradiation
information (results) diation information (results)
information (results)

Chapter 6
OO Functions of the system monitor screen
Status of the AeroDR De-
System status Device status
tector
Host status Printer status Status of JM
Status of RIS-IN Status of RIS-OUT EMR Image
Status of examination shar- Status of examination shar-
-
ing (reception) ing (transmission)

87
6.1 Function lists of the each screen

OO Other functions
Exposure with AeroDR Portable RF Unit Exposure with AeroDR Portable UF Unit
Screen structure Screen structure
Exposure preparations Exposure preparations
Exposure Exposure
Change of the AP information Change of the AP information
Operations after exposure Operations after exposure
Change of the IP address of the con- Change of the IP address of the connect-
nected institution network ed institution network
Other functions of AeroDR Portable RF Other functions of AeroDR Portable UF
Unit Unit
Auto stitching exposure with AeroDR
Manual stitching exposure
Detector
Screen structure
Screen structure
Exposure
Exposure
Image combination
Image combination
Image adjustment
Image adjustment
CR stitching cassette exposure
Mammogram exposure
Screen structure
Screen structure
Exposure
Exposure
Image combination
Chest wall blackening process adjustment
Image adjustment
Multi-study
Media output
Screen structure
Screen structure
Multi-study examination from patient reg-
Output to media
istration screen
Operation of the PDI viewer
Multi-study examination from list screen
Examination sharing
Statistics • summary tool
Screen structure
Screen structure
Reception of examination information
Acquisition of various information
Transmission of examination information
Options of information (filter conditions)
Transmission of examination information
during exposure
Other functions
Switching of the wireless communication
function of the AeroDR Detector
Release of the X-ray linkage when using
AeroDR S-SRM KIT
Screen saver -
Bar code reader and magnetic card
reader
Addition of high precision monitor
Addition of sub monitor
Addition of monitor for checking image

88
6.2 Functions of the patient registration screen

6.2.1 Search registration

You can search for patient information in the patient


database of this device or a higher system and then
register it.

1 Input patient name, ID, etc.

• Registration is performed in the patient data-


base of this device, and the exposure screen or
the body part selection screen is displayed.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Items that can be searched are "Patient ID" and "Pa-
tient Name".
• When searched with "Patient ID", only completely
matching patient IDs can be searched, and when
searched with "Patient Name", partially matching
names can also be searched.
• Search will be performed when the cursor moves from
items that can be searched, or the [Search] is pressed.
• A search is performed once for each patient data input.
When running the search again, do so after clearing
the patient data being input by pressing [Clear].
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Chapter 6
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• Reading patient information by barcode reader after
focusing on the patient ID enables you to display the
information for that patient. You can also transition to
the exposure screen at the same time the barcode is
read, depending on the setting.
• When there are multiple search results, a list of exami-
nation results is displayed. Select the target search
• Search results are displayed. from the list and press [OK] to register the examina-
tion. Press [Patient Search] to display the search
result of the selected examination. Pressing [Cancel]
2 Press [Perform]. returns to the previous screen.

• When searching a higher system, examination results can


also be acquired, depending on the settings selected.
• When examination data is acquired, the correspond-
ing examination is displayed.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

89
6.2 Functions of the patient registration screen

6.2.2 Emergency registration

When patient details are unknown at the time of an


emergency, the examination can be performed after
performing patient registration with emergency regis-
tration.

1 Press the field for the patient ID.

• Registration as an emergency patient is per-


formed in the patient database of this device,
and the exposure screen or the body part selec-
tion screen is displayed.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When a patient is registered as an emergency patient,
a mark indicating emergency patient is displayed in
the patient information display area.

2 Input an arbitrary ID.

•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• The ID input in step 2 is set during installation.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

3 Press [Enter].

90
6.3 Functions of the list screen

6.3.1 Display of details of 6.3.2 Display of examination


examination history
The details of examinations can be displayed on the The history of finished examinations can be displayed.
list screen.

1 Select the examination to display its details.


1 Select the [Completed] tab.

2 Press [ ].

Chapter 6
• A list of finished examinations is displayed.

2 Select an examination to display its his-


tory.

• The details of the examination are displayed on


the examination information display area. ­

91
6.3 Functions of the list screen

3 Press [ Refer ].
6.3.3 Display of examinations
with refined search
Conditions can be refined for examinations displayed
on the list screen.

Screen structure
This is the screen for refined display of the examina-
tion.

(3)
(1) (4)
(2) (5)

(6)

Number Name Functions


Inputs/displays filter condi-
Filter conditions tions. Use the input panel/
(1)
input column selection buttons/keyboard
to input the conditions.
• The images for the examination history are dis-
Selects filter conditions. You
played. Input panel/Se-
(2) can select multiple condi-
lection buttons
tions.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Clears the input filter condi-
(3) Clear button
tions.
• The examination history screen can also be displayed
Performs filtering with the
by double-clicking an examination which refers to a (4) Filter button
input filter conditions.
history.
Filters the examinations for
• Images of the displayed examination can be re-adjust-
which the conditions are not
ed and output again. (5) Blank button
input when filter conditions
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • are selected.
Cancels all the selection but-
Selection can- tons. This button is displayed
(6)
cellation button only when selection buttons
are displayed.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• The keyboard may be displayed as shown below.

•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

92
6.3 Functions of the list screen

Procedure for refined display 3 Press [Filter].

1 Select the tab to display the refined


search.

2 Input a keyword under refinement.

• The refined search results are displayed.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Chapter 6
• When an accession number or patient ID is read from
• Press [Clear] if you have input the wrong key- a bar code or magnetic card, the focus will automati-
word, or to search with another keyword. cally move to the corresponding examination informa-
tion.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

93
6.3 Functions of the list screen

6.3.4 Modification of exami- 3 Select the item to be modified and input


the necessary information.
nation information
After registration of an examination, the examination
information can be modified.

1 Select an examination to modify.

• After selecting the item to be modified, input the


necessary information.
• If you press [Enter], the cursor will move to the
next item.

4 Press [OK].
2 Press [Modify].

• A confirmation screen is displayed.


• The patient information is displayed.

94
6.3 Functions of the list screen

5 Press [OK].
6.3.5 Deletion of examinations

When registered incorrectly, the examination informa-


tion can be deleted after the examination is registered.

1 Select an examination to delete.

• Press [Cancel] to return to the previous screen.

2 Press [Delete].

• The modified content is reflected, and display


returns to the list screen.

Chapter 6

• A confirmation screen is displayed.

95
6.3 Functions of the list screen

3 Press [OK].
6.3.6 Addition of exposure conditions
to completed examinations
Exposure conditions can be added to completed ex-
aminations.

1 Select the [Completed] tab.

• The examination is deleted.


• Press [Cancel] to return to the previous screen.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Deletion of examination is possible only when there is
no exposure.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

2 Select the examination to which to add


exposure conditions.

3 Press [Append].

96
6.3 Functions of the list screen

5 Select the [OrderList] tab.

• A confirmation screen is displayed.

4 Press [OK].
6 Select the paused examination, and add
exposure conditions.

• Press [Cancel] to return to the previous screen.

Chapter 6

• The selected examination will disappear from


the [Completed] tab and move to the [OrderList]
tab on hold.

97
6.3 Functions of the list screen

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
6.3.7 Protection of examinations • Pressing [Guard] again while selecting a protected ex-
amination will cancel protection.
As hard disk space decreases, examinations are •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
automatically deleted beginning with the oldest one.
Examinations can be protected so that they are not
automatically deleted.

1 Select an examination to protect.

2 Press [Guard].

• For protected examinations, "G" is displayed for


the "Guard" items on the list screen.

98
6.4 Functions of the body part selection screen

6.4.1 Change of exposure 6.4.2 Deletion of exposure


conditions conditions
When the body part is selected manually, exposure When the body part is selected manually, exposure
conditions can be changed. conditions can be deleted.

1 Select the exposure condition to change. 1 Select the exposure condition to delete.

2 Press the set key to be changed. 2 Press [Delete].

Chapter 6

• The exposure condition is changed. • The exposure condition is deleted.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• The exposure conditions of exposed images cannot
be deleted.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

99
6.4 Functions of the body part selection screen

6.4.3 Change of order of ex-


posure conditions
When body part selection is performed manually, the
order of exposure conditions can be changed.

1 Drag the exposure conditions.

• The order of exposure conditions is changed.

• A white line is displayed at the position where


the order can be changed.

2 Drop it at a position to change the order.

100
6.5 Functions of the exposure screen

6.5.1 Change of order of ex- 6.5.2 Discard (deletion of im-


posures ages)
During exposure, the order of exposures can be After exposure, unwanted images can be discarded (deleted).
changed. The following procedure explains assuming that 2 im-
* Numbers (1), (2) displayed on the screen are shown ages have been exposed.
for ease of explanation, and not displayed on the * Numbers (1), (A), (2) displayed on the screen are
actual screen. shown for ease of explanation, and not displayed
on the actual screen.

1 Drag the exposure conditions display area 1 Select the image to delete.
to change the order of exposure.

(1) (2)
(2)
(1)

2 Press [ ].

2 Drop it on the image display area at the


desired location.

Chapter 6
(1) (2)

(2)

(1)

(2) (1)

• "Expose again?" is displayed.


→ Press [OK] to retake the image.
→Go to procedure A
• Order of exposure is changed. → Press [Cancel] to delete without retaking the image.
→Go to procedure B

101
6.5 Functions of the exposure screen

 Procedure A  Procedure B

3 Press [OK]. 3 Press [Cancel].

(1) (A) (1) (2)

(2)

• Exposures can be made with frame (A) to which • The image of (1) becomes the discard target.
exposure conditions (1) are copied. • The [ ] of (1) changes to [ ].
• Frame (2) moves to the bottom left.
• [ ] of (1) changes to [ ].
4 Press [ ].

4 Press [ ].
(1) (2)

(1) (A)

(2)

• The image in (1) is deleted.

• The image in (1) is deleted. IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •


• Standard discard method is explained in the previous
steps.
• It is possible to immediately delete the discarded im-
age or save the images that are discard target. These
are setup at installation.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

102
6.5 Functions of the exposure screen

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
6.5.3 Cancellation of discard
• When the CR cassette is registered with the bar code, (deletion of images)
the bar code information will also be deleted when an
image is lost. Perform bar code registration again. Even when discard is performed, until the examination
• Function to save or delete discarded images is set at is ended, discard can be cancelled.
installation.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
1 Press [ ] for the discarded image.

Chapter 6
• A confirmation screen is displayed.

2 Press [OK].

• Press [Cancel] to return to the previous screen.

103
6.5 Functions of the exposure screen

6.5.4 Change of exposure devices

During exposure, the exposure device can be changed.

1 Press the device icon of the frame where


you want to change the exposure device.

• [ ] changes to [ ].

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Perform cancellation of discard before the examina-
tion is completed. Be careful because discard cannot
be cancelled after the examination is completed.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The wall stand is registered in this example.
• The function to cancel discard is set during installa-
tion.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

• Device icons registered in the exposure room


are displayed.

2 Select a device icon to change.

• In this example, the AeroDR Detector is selected.

104
6.5 Functions of the exposure screen

6.5.5 Switching from the AeroDR


Detector to the CR cassette
When exposing with an AeroDR Detector, it is possible
to switch to exposure with CR cassette.

1 Move focus to the unexposed image area


to be exposed by the AeroDR Detector.

• The exposure device is changed.

2 Read bar code of the CR cassette.

Chapter 6
• The bar code number is displayed in the expo-
sure conditions display area.

3 Perform exposure using the registered CR


cassette.
• Configure the X-ray device settings and check
the exposure information before making an ex-
posure.

Press the exposure switch of


the X-ray device

105
6.5 Functions of the exposure screen

4 The image is read with the REGIUS.


6.5.6 Switching from the CR cas-
sette to the AeroDR Detector
When exposing with a CR cassette, it is possible to
switch to exposure with an AeroDR Detector.

1 Move focus to the unexposed image area


to be exposed by the CR cassette.

• The exposed image is displayed.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The device can also be switched to CR cassette by
pressing the device icon in the unexposed image dis-
play area.

2 Press the device icon.

••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

• Device icons registered in the exposure room


are displayed.

106
6.5 Functions of the exposure screen

3 Select the device in which the AeroDR De-


6.5.7 Switching of AeroDR
tector is inserted.
Detectors
When exposing with an AeroDR Detector, it is possible
to switch to exposure with another AeroDR Detector.
The following procedure describes an example of ex-
posure under the following conditions.

Exposure device
The devices to be used for exposure are as follows.
• AeroDR Detector (A) x 1
• AeroDR Detector (B) x 1
• AeroDR Detector (C) x 1

Exposure sequence
The relationship between the exposure sequence and
4 Perform exposure. the AeroDR Detector to be used is as follows.
• Configure the X-ray device settings and check
the exposure information before making an ex- (1) (2)
posure.
Exposure with Exposure with
AeroDR Detector (A) AeroDR Detector (A)
Press the exposure switch of
the X-ray device

(3) (4)

Exposure with Exposure with


AeroDR Detector (B) AeroDR Detector (A)

* The exposure sequence ((1) - (4)) and AeroDR

Chapter 6
Detector (A)(B)(C) are displayed for ease of ex-
planation, and are not displayed on the actual
screen.

Circumstances
Performing exposure with AeroDR Detector (C) that
had been planned to be performed with AeroDR De-
tector (A).
• The exposed image is displayed.

1 Set focus on any of the image areas (1), (2)


or (4) registered with AeroDR Detector (A).

(1) (2)

Exposure with Exposure with


AeroDR Detector (A) AeroDR Detector (A)

(3) (4)

Exposure with Exposure with


AeroDR Detector (B) AeroDR Detector (A)

107
6.5 Functions of the exposure screen

2 Press the selection switch for AeroDR De-


tector (C). 6.5.8 Status of devices

The device status can be displayed in the image dis-


play area where no exposed image is displayed.

1 Set focus on unexposed image display


area.
(1) (2)

Exposure with Exposure with


AeroDR Detector (C) AeroDR Detector (C)

(3) (4)

Exposure with Exposure with


AeroDR Detector (B) AeroDR Detector (C)

• AeroDR Detector (A) used in exposure of (1), (2)


and (4) switches to AeroDR Detector (C).

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The device can also be switched to a different AeroDR
Detector by pressing the device icon in the unexposed
image display area.

• Status of devices is displayed.

OO Meaning of the device status


Display Description
Waiting for switch to response mode and
• In Step 2, when the selection switch for AeroDR De- Preparing
reset to finish.
tector (B) is pressed, the cursor moves to frame (3) to Waiting Standing by.
expose with AeroDR Detector (B).
Sleep Mode The AeroDR Detector is sleeping.
Ready Exposure is ready.
(1) (2) Status where exposure conditions for ex-
Panel not amination are not set yet, and no AeroDR
detected Detector is inserted in either wall stand and
table.
For reasons such as no AeroDR Detector
Please check is inserted in the wall stand and table, or
(3) (4) panel power is off, exposure is not possible with
the AeroDR Detector.
Status after turning on the AeroDR Detector
Starting
until exposure is ready.
Error Error is occurring.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

108
6.5 Functions of the exposure screen

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
6.5.9 Edit of image supple-
• With the REGIUS, items determined by the inserted mental information
CR cassette, "Reading Size", "Reading Direction", and
"Reading Position" are not displayed. After exposure, image supplemental information can
• The following are displayed in the image display area be edited.
where no exposure has been performed.
– Device icon
– Exposure conditions (resolution, size, direction, po-
1 Select images to edit their supplemental
information.
sition)
• A confirmation screen is displayed when the image
processing related to "Pneumoconiosis" is changed.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

2 Press [Additional].

Chapter 6

• The image supplemental information editing


screen is displayed.

109
6.5 Functions of the exposure screen

3 Edit the image supplemental information.


6.5.10 Edit of patient informa-
tion
Patient information can be modified.

1 Select the patient whose patient informa-


tion is to be modified on the list screen,
and press [Perform] or [Modify].

4 Press [ OK ].

• When [Modify] is pressed


→ Go to step 3

• The exposure screen is displayed.

• Returns to the exposure screen. 2 Press [ ].

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Input the patient orientation in the form of "[Row
orientation]¥[Line orientation]."
• For the values available for the [Row orientation] and
[Line orientation], refer to the options of the Patient
orientation (Row) and Patient orientation (Line) on the
exposure condition key edit tool screen.
• To display the Patient orientation (Row) and Patient
orientation (Line), select the property edit tab on the
exposure condition key edit tool screen, and select the
exposure condition master for the master/sub master
selection.
• For the details of the Patient orientation (Row) and Pa-
tient orientation (Line), refer to the DICOM Standard.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
­
110
6.5 Functions of the exposure screen

5 Press [OK].

• The patient information editing screen is dis-


played.
• Press [Cancel] to return to the previous screen.

3 Edit the patient information.

• The edited content is reflected, and display re-


4 Press [ OK ]. turns to the exposure screen.

Chapter 6

• A confirmation screen is displayed.

111
6.5 Functions of the exposure screen

6.5.11 Switch of screen display B The lower control area is hidden, and the
work area is enlarged.
of the exposure screen
On the exposure screen, the screen display format can
be changed.

1 Press any of the (1) to (3) [Work Area


Zoom] tabs.

• To display the lower control area again, press


the (2) [Work Area Zoom] tab.

(1) (3) C The control panel is hidden, and the work


(2) area is enlarged.

• When the (1) [Work Area Zoom] tab is pressed


→ Go to A
• When the (2) [Work Area Zoom] tab is pressed
→ Go to B.
• When the (3) [Work Area Zoom] tab is pressed
→ Go to C

A The examination display area is hidden, and


the work area is enlarged.
• To display the control panel again, press the (3)
[Work Area Zoom] tab.

• To display the examination display area again,


press the (1) [Work Area Zoom] tab.

112
6.5 Functions of the exposure screen

6.5.12 Switch of screen display 6.5.13 Full-screen image


format display
The display format of the exposure screen can be Captured images can be displayed on the full screen.
switched to match the examination situation.
The following procedure describes the case of switch-
ing from the 2x2 display screen to the 3x2 display 1 Select the image to be displayed on the
screen as an example. full screen.

1 Press [ ].

2 Double-click the image display area.

Chapter 6
• Switches to the 3x2 display screen.

• The image is displayed on the full screen.

113
6.5 Functions of the exposure screen

3 To cancel the full-screen display, double-


6.5.14 Rotation and flip of
click the image display area again.
display
Rotates/flips exposed images.

1 Select an image to rotate/flip.

• The control panel automatically switches to the


[Image Proc] tab. If it does not switch, select the
[Image Proc] tab manually.

2 Press [Rotate&Flip].

• The display returns to the normal image.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The control of the full-screen display can be associ-
ated with either double-click in the image display area
or that in the exposure conditions display area by the
setting. The full-screen display function is not available
in the initial settings. Contact Konica Minolta service
representatives to use this function.
• Double click can be substituted with double touch in
the exposure conditions display area.
• You can double-click only by using a mouse in the ex-
posure conditions display area.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

• The selection screen is displayed.

114
6.5 Functions of the exposure screen

3 Select the item to apply.


6.5.15 Panning of an image

When an image that is larger than the size of the


image display area is displayed, the image can be
panned.

1 Select an image to pan.

2 Press [Pan].

• The rotation/flip is reflected in the image.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When [Original] (flip off) and [Flip] (flip on) are dis-

Chapter 6
played on the upper right portion of the selection
screen, select the rotating image after pressing [Flip]
when flipping and rotating 1 image.
• Set to hide/unhide [Original] and [Flip] during installa-
tion. 3 Drag the image to pan.

••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

115
6.5 Functions of the exposure screen

6.5.16 Deletion of registration


of CR cassette regis-
tered with bar code
When exposing with CR cassette, the registration of
a CR cassette registered with bar code can be can-
celled.

1 Press the exposure conditions display


area for the exposure condition to delete
• The image can be panned by dragging it. registration.

• A confirmation screen is displayed.

2 Press [OK].

• Press [Cancel] to return to the previous screen.

116
6.5 Functions of the exposure screen

6.5.17 Hold of the examination

In the course of exposure, an examination can be paused.

1 Press [ ].

• The bar code registration is deleted.

Chapter 6
• A confirmation screen is displayed.

2 Press [OK].

• Press [Cancel] to return to the previous screen.

117
6.5 Functions of the exposure screen

6.5.18 Overlay

"Marker 1", "Marker 2", "Stamp", and "Grid/Scale" can


be overlaid on the exposed image.

1 Select the [Overlay] tab.

• Returns to the list screen.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Do not press [ ] until this image is displayed.
• For the examinations on hold, "Suspend" is displayed
in the status field of the list screen.
• The exposure conditions for the examination on hold
cannot be deleted, in order to prevent mistaken opera-
tions.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

• The screen switches to the control panel of


overlay.

2 Input the overlay by operating the control


panel.
• When inputting a marker, or stamp
→ Go to step 3
• When inputting a grid/scale
→ Go to step 6

118
6.5 Functions of the exposure screen

3 Press either [Marker 1], [Marker 2] or [Stamp]. 5 Select the display position for marker, or
stamp.

• For both marker and stamp select 1 of the 4 corners.


→ Go to step 8

6 Press [Scale].

• The screen corresponding to the pressed button


will be displayed.

4 Press an item to display.

Chapter 6

• The selection screen is displayed.

• The overlay is displayed.

119
6.5 Functions of the exposure screen

7 Press either [Measure1], [Measure2] or


[Grid].

• The preview is displayed.


• Press [OK], and the preview disappears.

• Press [OFF] to quit the display.


IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Confirm that the overlay is reflected at the output des-
tination.
• The gird/scale markings (Grid/Measure 1/Measure 2)
are not measurement functions. Do not use them to
measure images.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• The set characters and stamp are as follows.
Marker type Characters
Marker 1 R, L
A→P, P→A, R→L, L→R, RAO,
Marker 2 LAO, RPO, LPO, C→C, M→L,
• A grid or scale is displayed. M→R

Stamp
8 Press [Preview]. Set at installation.

Grid/scale type Details


Grid Displays 50 mm square grid
Displays 5 mm interval scale
Measure 1
around an image
Displays 5 mm interval scale
Measure 2 on the right center and bottom
center of an image

* Grid and scale cannot be displayed at the same time.


•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

120
6.5 Functions of the exposure screen

6.5.19 Highlight function for 2 Press the [Tube/Gauze] button.

the tube/gauze
This function highlights the tube and/or gauze in cap-
tured images.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The highlight function for the tube/gauze is available
for the images of the following body parts.
Front view of the chest Side view of the chest
Front view of the abdomen Side view of the abdo-
Front and side views of the men
head Towne view of the head
Front view of the child Side view of the child
chest chest
Infant chest and abdomen
• When the highlight function for the tube/gauze is not
OFF, the [E process], [F process], and [Hybrid] buttons
cannot be operated on the [Image control] or [Custom]
tabs on the control panel. Also, the E, F, and HS pa-
rameters cannot be changed on the viewer screen.
• In the case where the S/G value etc. were changed af-
ter the level of the highlight function for the tube/gauze
has been changed, when the function is turned off af-
ter that, the image returns to that before the level was
changed, and consequently the S/G value etc. return
to the former values.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• The highlight function for the tube/gauze is turned on
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • and off every time you press the [tube/Gauze] button.

Chapter 6
• When an image with a highlighted tube/gauze is
shared with this device which is not licensed for the
highlight function, the image will be displayed with the Tube/Gauze: Tube/Gauze:
highlighted tube/gauze, but you cannot change the OFF Level 2
highlight level or deactivate the highlight function with
this unlicensed device.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Highlight display of the tube/gauze Changing the highlight level

1 Select the [QUICK] tab. 1 Press the [Tube/Gauze] button for 1 sec-
ond.

121
6.5 Functions of the exposure screen

6.5.20 Automatic 1×1 display


function
When examining with a 2x2 display screen or a 3x2
display screen, they can be changed to a 1x1 display
screen automatically when the exposed image is re-
ceived.
The following procedure describes an example of
what happens when, while having the screen display
set to 2x2, exposure is carried out with the automatic
1x1 display function enabled. The exposure order and
body parts are as follows.
• The highlight level change dialog box is dis-
played. (1) (2)

CHEST _ Chest CHEST _ Chest


2 Press "OFF" or the button of the level to Erect _ Front Erect _ LAT

be changed on the highlight level change


dialog box.

* Exposure order (1), (2) are implied, and there-


fore are not actually displayed on the screen.

1 Perform exposure (1).

(1) (2)

• The highlight level is changed.

Press the exposure switch of


the X-ray device

122
6.5 Functions of the exposure screen

(1) (2)

• Changes to 1x1 display and begins reception. • Returns to the 2x2 display screen and the focus
• The button is displayed in the exposure condi- moves to the next unexposed frame.
tions display area.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• When the button countdown reaches 0, the previous
screen will be displayed and the focus will move to the
next exposure conditions.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• When reception of exposed images is finished


(images are displayed), the button displays a

Chapter 6
countdown in seconds.
• Before the countdown reaches 0, if any operation is
performed on the image, the countdown is stopped,
and the button changes to display "NEXT".

2 Press [NEXT].

123
6.5 Functions of the exposure screen

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
6.5.21 Image preview • When the actual image is displayed, focus automati-
cally moves to the next exposure frame. When that
exposure is the final one, the focus does not move.
When an image is being received, a preview image is
• Even during image preview, image adjustment can be
displayed in the image display area. Appropriate gradi-
performed. While the preview image is displayed, se-
ent processing is automatically performed for each ex-
lect the [Image Proc] tab on the control panel, and ad-
posed image, and density and contrast are automati-
just the image. During image adjustment, focus does
cally adjusted to be suitable for checking.
not move to another frame.
Appearance of the image display area •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Flow of time

Exposure

While an exposed image is being


received, the image is displayed.

After reception is completed, the preview screen


is displayed. S value/G value are displayed and
image adjustment can be performed.

The actual image is displayed.

124
6.6 Functions of the viewer screen

Before each operation, select the image to adjust and


select the [Image Proc] tab on the control panel. 6.6.1 Change of E/F/HS
parameters
Image adjustment performed on the viewer screen
Changing E/F/HS parameters The parameters can be changed.
Changing ROI area
Changing effective image area
1 Press [Tool].
Changing masking area
Removing grid again
Positioning of annotation

• There are 3 types of processing: E process, F


process, and HS process.

Chapter 6
• The viewer screen is displayed.

2 Select the process and change the param-


eter.

125
6.6 Functions of the viewer screen

Icon Functions
6.6.2 Change of the ROI area
Switches the E process [ON]/
[OFF].
This device will automatically recognize the ROI
and display in the image area. The ROI area can be
Switches the F process [ON]/
changed manually as necessary.
[OFF].

Switches the Hybrid process 1 Press [ROI Adjustment].


[ON]/[OFF].

Switches the HS process [ON]/


[OFF].

Performs fine adjustments.

Resets operations performed


in the tab.

3 Press [Return] after the change.

• The viewer screen is displayed.

2 Change the ROI area.

• Returns to the exposure screen.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• E/F/HS parameters can be changed individually.
• The results of the changed parameter, such as E/F/
HS, are automatically stored, and can also be reflect-
ed in following exposures.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

126
6.6 Functions of the viewer screen

Icon Functions 6.6.3 Change of the effective


image area
Switch between [ON] and
[OFF] of ROI mode.
Although this device automatically recognizes the ef-
fective image area and displays it within the image
Press any 2 points to specify area, the effective image area can be adjusted manu-
the square with a diagonal line
that connects the 2 points as
ally as necessary.
the size of the ROI area.

Adjust the width of the ROI 1 Press [Cropping].


area. The width changes every
time you press these buttons.
Adjust the height of the ROI
area. The height changes every
time you press these buttons.
Switch between the displays
of 2 ROIs when the image pro-
cessing parameter has 2 ROIs.

Resets operations performed


in the tab.

* W
 hen an image is pressed in any location, ROI moves
with the pressed part as the center.

3 Press [Return] after change.

Chapter 6
• The viewer screen is displayed.

2 Change the effective image area.

• Returns to the exposure screen.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When the ROI area is changed, the auto gradient pro-
cess is performed again, and the optimized image is
displayed.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

127
6.6 Functions of the viewer screen

Icon Functions IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •


• If image recognition fails and an inappropriate effec-
Switch between [ON] and [OFF]
of the image processing tempo- tive image area is set during automatic reading, the
rarily. image may become white or black all over. When this
happens, temporarily set the image processing to
Press any 2 points to specify [OFF] and set the appropriate effective image area.
the square with a diagonal line •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
that connects the 2 points as
the size of the effective image
area. HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• Depending on the printer, the output may be smaller
Adjust the width of the effective than the effective image area. When this type of print-
image area. The width chang- er is used, specify the effective image area in advance
es every time you press these assuming a smaller output.
buttons.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Adjust the height of the effec-
tive image area. The height
changes every time you press
these buttons.

Resets operations performed


in the tab.

3 Press [Return] after change.

• Returns to the exposure screen.

128
6.6 Functions of the viewer screen

6.6.4 Change of the masking 2 Change the masking area.

area
Although this device automatically recognizes the
exposure field area and performs masking to dis-
play within the image area, the masking area can be
changed manually when necessary.

1 Press [Masking].

Icon Functions

Switch between [ON] and


[OFF] of the masking area
display.

Specify a masking area by


automatically recognizing the
effective image area.

Press any 2 points to specify a


square with a diagonal line that
connects the 2 points as the
size of the masking area.

Press any 4 points or more to


specify a polygonal masking
area.

Press any 3 points to specify a


round masking area.

Chapter 6
Switch between [ON] and
[OFF] of the chest wall black
masking process.

Resets operations performed


in the tab.
• The viewer screen is displayed.
This is displayed in the specified
masking area. Drag to adjust
the size of the masking area.

Move the masking frame up,


down, left and right.

3 Press [Return] after change.

129
6.6 Functions of the viewer screen

6.6.5 How to remove grid again

This device performs the automatic removal process of


the grid, but the grid can be removed again manually
as necessary.

1 Select the image to remove the grid again.

• Returns to the exposure screen.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• After specifying a masking area, drag any point of the
masking area to change the shape of the masking
area.

2 Press one of [ROI Adjustment], [Masking],


[Cropping], or [Viewer].

• The results of masking recognition outside the expo-


sure field can be confirmed on the viewer screen or
the image display area of the exposure screen.
• The accuracy of masking can be increased by paying
attention to the following at exposure.
– Place protective equipment as parallel to the edge
of the exposure field as possible or place it so it
does not overlap the exposure field edge.
– Make sure that objects (clothes or subject area
other than the target) other than the target body
part for exposure are not included in the image.
– Place the exposure target body part at the center
of the exposure field as much as possible.
– When split exposure is performed, provide an inter-
val of at least 1 cm between exposure fields before
exposure.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

• The viewer screen is displayed.

130
6.6 Functions of the viewer screen

3 Press [RemoveGrid]. 5 Press [Return] after the grid is removed again.

• Control panel to adjust the parameters is displayed. • Returns to the exposure screen.

4 Remove the grid again.

Chapter 6
• Select the grid direction and grid density.

131
6.6 Functions of the viewer screen

3 Select the annotation to be positioned.


6.6.6 Positioning of annotation

Using the annotation function, arbitrary characters can


be placed on an image.

1 Select an image on which you want to posi-


tion an annotation.

4 Select the place to position the annota-


tion.

• The control panel automatically switches to the


[Image Proc] tab. If it does not switch, select the
[Image Proc] tab manually.

2 Press [Text].

• Annotation is added.

• The viewer screen is displayed.

132
6.6 Functions of the viewer screen

5 Press [Return] after the placement of an- HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••


notation is completed. • You can also position an annotation by pressing either
[ROI Adjustment], [Masking], [Cropping], or [Viewer],
displaying the viewer screen, and pressing [Text].
• When you rotate or flip an image after positioning an
annotation, the following operation is performed. The
position of the annotation textbox is linked to the rota-
tion or flip of the image, but the characters themselves
do not rotate or flip.

Rotation example (90 degree rotation)

Flip example (left right flip)

• If you display the text box using any of the following


• Returns to the exposure screen. methods, you can freely enter an annotation. Enter the
annotation text using the keyboard.
– Click anywhere on the image.

Chapter 6
– When you select an annotation in Step 3, click
where characters are not registered.

• You can move the annotation you placed using the


mouse.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

133
6.6 Functions of the viewer screen

6.6.7 Adjustment of annotation

Annotations placed can be adjusted.

1 Select an annotation to adjust.

• Returns to the exposure screen.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• When placed annotations are double clicked, the an-
notation characters can be edited. An annotation can
have up to 256 characters and can also contain line-
feeds.
• Character content of a rotated annotation cannot be
modified. Return the character to the unrotated state (0
2 Adjust the annotation.
degrees) once before modifying the character content.
• When [Overall size] is selected as the output method
Icon Functions
after an annotation is positioned, the entire image and
Text size Adjust the size of characters the character size of annotation are reduced together.
adjustment by moving the slider. When setting [Overall size] for outputting a large size
image with a small film, you need to be careful by
Character color switches be-
tween black and white every making the character size of the annotation larger.
time the button is pressed. Also, even with the film with the same character size
and output method, the character size will differ slight-
Background color switches be-
tween white, black, and transparent ly depending on the setting of resolution.
every time the button is pressed. • Character color and background color are linked.
When setting character color to "White", background
The character is rotated 15 de-
grees in the clockwise or coun- color can be selected from either "Black" or "None".
ter-clockwise direction centering When setting character color to "Black", background
at the top left of the character ev- color can be selected from either "White" or "None".
ery time each button is pressed. • Settings of the font size, font color, and background
All positioned annotations are color are saved even after the device is restarted.
deleted. •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Selected annotations are deleted.

3 Press [Return] after the adjustment of an-


notation is completed.

134
6.6 Functions of the viewer screen

6.6.8 Creating/editing of 3 Create or edit characters, and press [OK].

annotation characters
Characters to place in annotations can be created and
edited.

1 Select a row with no annotation or select


a row with characters to edit.

• Press [Cancel] to quit creation or editing.

2 Press [Edit].

• Content is reflected in the row selected in step 1.

Chapter 6
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• Up to 10 annotations can be created per tab.
• Annotations registered in each tab can have up to 14
character.
• To delete the selected characters, press [Delete] dur-
ing step 2.

•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The input screen is displayed.

135
6.7 Output function

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
6.7.1 Individual output • The output destination device icon is lit in green during
output.
Once examination is finished, exposed images can be • When an error occurs during output, the output desti-
not only batch output, but also output individually. nation device icon is lit in red. Output is resumed when
the cause of error is solved.
• During output, when adjustment is performed on the
1 Select an image to output. image being output, the results of image adjustment
during output are not reflected.
• The device icon of the host is displayed also when the
electronic medical record is specified as the output
destination.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

2 Press [ ].

• The device icon of the output destination (host


(electronic medical record)/printer) is displayed.
• [ ] changes to [ ] indicating that output
is done.

136
6.7 Output function

3 Press [OK].
6.7.2 Additional output

Images already output can be output again.

1 Press [ ] after displaying the image to


output again.

• When not outputting, press [Cancel].


­

Chapter 6
• The output destination selection screen is dis-
played.
• The output destination selection screen is dis-
played with the previously transmitted destina-
tion selected.

2 Select the output destination.

• It is possible to select multiple transmission des-


tinations.

137
6.7 Output function

6.7.3 Change of host (elec- 4 Change the cropping size.

tronic medical record)


output conditions
The conditions of images output to a host (electronic
medical record) can be changed.

1 Select the [Output] tab.

Icon/Function name Functions

Select the cropping size. Set


TrimmingSize the trimming size type during
installation.

Select the direction (portrait or


landscape) of the output.

Adjust the cropping width. The


width changes every time the
button is pressed.
2 Select an image to output.
Adjust the cropping height. The
height changes every time the
button is pressed.

Returns to the state when im-


age was displayed.

5 Press [ ].

3 Press [Host].

138
6.7 Output function

6.7.4 Change of printer output


conditions
The conditions of images output to a printer can be
changed.

1 Select the [Output] tab.

• The image is output to the host (electronic medi-


cal record), and [ ] is displayed in the image
display area.
• [ ] changes to [ ] indicating that output
is done.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The same procedure applies when outputting to an
electronic medical record.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
2 Select an image to output.

Chapter 6
3 Press [Printer].

139
6.7 Output function

4 Change the output conditions.


6.7.5 Printer output in A for-
• Setting items are as following.
mat
Item Options
A format 1 image can be output in 1 sheet of film.
Outputs 1 image on 1 sheet.
Format AB format
Outputs 2 images in alignment left-right 1 Select the [Output] tab.
or top-bottom 1 by 1.
8" x 10", 10" x 12", 11" x 14", 14" x 14",
14" x 17"
Film size
* Only sizes that can be set in the
printer can be displayed.
Horizontal output
A format
Only 1 image can be output.

AB format
The A image is displayed on
top and the B image is on the
bottom.

The A image is displayed on 2 Press [Printer].


Direction the left and the B image is on
the right.
Vertical output
A format
Only 1 image can be output.

AB format
The A image is displayed on
top and the B image is on the
bottom.

The A image is displayed on


the left and the B image is on
the right.
Number 1-9 3 Select an image to output.
Overall size
Print an image after reducing the size
so that the image size is full size for the
film to be printed. When the film size is
larger than the image, print the image at
Output type the same magnification.
Life size
Print the image at the same magnifica-
tion. When the read image is larger than
the output area of the film, parts outside
the output area are cut off.
Returns to the state when image was
displayed.

140
6.7 Output function

4 Select [ ] in [Format].

• The image is output to the printer, and [ ] is


displayed in the image display area.
• [ ] changes to [ ] indicating that output is
5 Change [Film Size], [Direction], etc. done.

6 Press [ ].

Chapter 6

141
6.7 Output function

6.7.6 Printer output in AB for- 4 Select [ ] from [Format].

mat
2 different images can be output in 1 sheet of film.

1 Select the [Output] tab.

5 Change [Film Size], [Direction], [Output


Type], etc.

2 Press [Printer].

6 Select an image (2nd one) to output.

3 Select an image (first one) to output.

• After selecting the images, select [AB Format]


from [Format] following Steps 4 to 5, and change
the [Film Size], [Direction], and [Output Type].
• Set the [Film Size], [Direction], and [Output
Type] the same as the selected image in the first
sheet.

142
6.7 Output function

7 Press [ ] of the first image to be output.

• A confirmation screen is displayed.

9 Press [OK].

• The icon will change to [ ] which denotes


pair waiting status.

8 Press [ ] of the 2nd image to be output.

Chapter 6
• The images are output to the printer, and [ ]
is displayed in each image display area.
• [ ] changes to [ ] indicating that output is
done.

143
6.7 Output function

– When [Cancel] is pressed on the confirmation


IMPORTANT ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
screen displayed during output, pairing of the im-
• When outputting in AB format, be careful of the follow-
ages are released.
ing.
– When [Life Size] is selected as [Output Type], a
– Images are outputting as a pair only when the for-
cropping frame is displayed on the image. The size
mat, film size, and film orientation of the 2 images
of cropping frame changes automatically according
to be output are the same. If there is no matching
to the film size, length, and width and height of the
image, then only 1 image is output.
film output area. The cropping frame can be moved
by pressing the cropping frame move button
When there is a matching pair
[ ], or by selecting the destination
of the cropping frame.

When there is no matching pair

Cropping frame move button


Cropping frame

•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
– Images are assigned to a film in the order in which
[ ] is pressed.
– While waiting for a pair, if the format, film size, or
film orientation is changed, the waiting for a pair
state is released.
– The confirmation screen displayed when outputting
displays [Swap]. Pressing [Swap] replaces image
positions left and right, or top and bottom.

144
6.7 Output function

6.7.7 Sort of preview images 3 Drop the image on a position that can be
switched.
(each image) for host output
Each preview image for host output can be sorted by
image.

1 Select the [Queue Cont.] tab.

• A white line is displayed at a position where the


order can be changed.

• The order is changed.

Chapter 6
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Previews are displayed in the sequence of • If there is an image already sent to the host, then the
transmission to the host. order of images of the series cannot be changed.
• A preview is displayed as 1 series per body part. • The order of images in another examination or across
series cannot be changed.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
2 Perform change of order.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• If there is an unexposed exposure condition, the de-
vice icon is displayed.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

145
6.7 Output function

6.7.8 Sort of preview images 3 Drop it on a position that can be switched.

(each series) for host output


Exposed images can be arranged in 1 series by expo-
sure body part. Preview images for host output can be
sorted by series.

1 Select the [Queue Cont.] tab.

• A white line is displayed at a position where the


order can be changed.

• The order is replaced.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• If there is an unexposed exposure condition, the de-
vice icon is displayed.
• Previews are displayed in the sequence of •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
transmission to the host.
• A preview is displayed as 1 series per body part.

2 Drag the series to change.

146
6.7 Output function

6.7.9 Sort of preview images 3 Press [Reset].

(transmitted) for host output


Preview images sent to the host are normally in a state
that cannot be sorted. When it is necessary to sort
preview images already sent to the host, they can be
sorted with the following procedure.

1 Select the [Queue Cont.] tab.

• A confirmation screen is displayed.

4 Press [OK].

Chapter 6
• Previews are displayed in the sequence of
transmission to the host.
• Transmitted series are displayed in gray.
• A preview is displayed as 1 series per body part.

2 Select a series already sent to the host.


• Press [Cancel] to return to the previous screen.

147
6.7 Output function

6.7.10 Automatic output

Depending on settings, the examination results can be


automatically output at the completion of the examina-
tion.

1 Perform exposure.
• Configure the X-ray device settings and check the
exposure information before making an exposure.
• The order of images can be changed in this
state. Press the exposure switch of
the X-ray device
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Series that include unexposed images cannot be
sorted.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• If there is an unexposed exposure condition, the de-
vice icon is displayed.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

• After reading the images, the remaining sec-


onds for automatic output will be displayed on
the output button.
• When the focus is moved, a countdown will begin.

• When the countdown reaches 0, the icon will


change to [ ] and output will begin.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• Before the countdown reaches 0, if any operation is
performed on the image, or when transitioned to a dif-
ferent screen, the number of seconds is reset to the
initial value and the countdown is stopped.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

148
6.8 Functions associated with X-ray irradiation information

X-ray irradiation information can be displayed on the


image by the setting. 6.8.1 Change of X-ray irradia-
tion information (results)
When it is necessary to change irradiation information
(results) after exposure, irradiation information (results)
can be changed with the following procedure.

1 Select an image to edit.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When linked to the X-ray device, editing can only be
made when X-ray irradiation results cannot be ac-
quired from the X-ray device.
• Risk of misidentification of patients may occur if modi-
fications to patient information are made. Be sure to
read "Chapter 1 Safety Precautions & Warnings". 2 Press the [Exp.Info] tab.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When there are no X-ray irradiation results associated
with an exposed image, result values are not displayed.

Chapter 6
• Editing of X-ray irradiation results is performed regard-
less of the existence of links to the X-ray device.
• Even if results were input before acquiring X-ray irradia-
tion results, they are overwritten with the irradiation re-
sults acquired from the X-ray device when the image is
read. If irradiation results could not be acquired from the
X-ray device, then the values are not overwritten.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
3 Press the number part of the item you
want to edit.

149
6.8 Functions associated with X-ray irradiation information

4 Input numerical values with the number


6.8.2 Change of mammogram
pad.
image X-ray irradiation
information (results)
When it is necessary to change irradiation information
(results) after mammography exposure, irradiation in-
formation (results) can be changed with the following
procedure.

1 Select an image to edit.

• The input value is reflected.

2 Press the [Exp. Info] tab.

3 Select anode and filter.

150
6.8 Functions associated with X-ray irradiation information

4 Press the number part of the item you


6.8.3 Replacement of X-ray irra-
want to edit.
diation information (results)
X-ray irradiation information (results) of the image ex-
posed with the CR cassette can be replaced.

1 Press [ ] of the image to be replaced.

5 Input numerical values with the number


pad.

• The input value is reflected.

Chapter 6
• The image display area is surrounded by a white
frame.

2 Press [ ] of the image to be replaced.

151
6.8 Functions associated with X-ray irradiation information

• A confirmation screen is displayed.

3 Press [OK].

• Press [Cancel] to return to the previous screen.

• The X-ray irradiation information (results) is re-


placed.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• To quit replacement, press [ ] of the same frame
again, or press any position other than [ ].
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

152
6.9 Functions of the system monitor screen

Status of this device and connected devices can be


confirmed in the [Network Status] tab of the system 6.9.1 System status
monitor screen.

The status of this device can be confirmed.

(1)

(2)

(6)
(3)

(4)

(5) (7)
• The system monitor screen is displayed when [Sys-
tem] is pressed on the initial screen or in the tool bar
on the body part selection screen. Number Name Functions
• If the network status is not displayed, press the [Net- Displays the name, serial
work Status] tab on the function switching tabs. CS-7 system
(1) number, version, and hospi-
Information
• The status of the selected device is displayed by se- tal ID of this device.
lecting the icon on the screen. Displays maximum capacity
(2) HDD of the hard disk and space in
use.
Displays the total number of
(3) Guarded Image
guarded images.
Displays utilization for the
CPU and memory. The ex-
(4) CPU/Memory
tent of utilization is displayed

Chapter 6
in %.
Network Infor- Displays the IP address and
(5)
mation subnet mask.
Displays processes and
(6) Process, Service
services.
(7) Back button Closes the screen.

153
6.9 Functions of the system monitor screen

6.9.2 Status of the AeroDR


6.9.3 Device status
Detector
The status of the AeroDR Detector can be confirmed. The status of REGIUS, X-ray device, RM, Generator
Interface Unit, and sub monitor connected to this de-
(1)
vice can be confirmed.

(1)

(2)

(2)
(3) (4)

(5)
(3)
(4)

Number Name Functions


The name of the AeroDR
Status of Aero- Detector, modality, error de- Number Name Functions
(1)
DR scription and battery status The device name, device
are displayed. [Device name]
(1) type, error description are
information
Status of wired or wire- displayed.
less connection for AeroDR The IP address of a device,
(2) Status Detector, IP address, Ping port number, ping status and
status, and device status are (2) Status
device condition are dis-
displayed. played.
Press to confirm the ping Press to confirm the ping
(3) Ping button (3) Ping button
status. status.
Releases the registration of (4) Back button Closes the screen.
(4) Cancel button
the AeroDR Detector.
(5) Back button Closes the screen.

154
6.9 Functions of the system monitor screen

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
6.9.4 Host status • To keep output reservations (queues) intentionally in
this device, set the output reservation to [OFF]. Delete
The status of hosts connected to this device can be unwanted queues among the accumulated queues,
confirmed. then switch the setting to [ON] so that only necessary
queues can be sent to the host.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
(1)
(4)
(2) (5)

(6)

(7)
(3)
(8)
(9)

Number Name Functions


The host name and error
(1) Host information
description are displayed.
Host IP address, port number,
(2) Status AE title, ping status, and de-
vice condition are displayed.
(3) Ping button Press to confirm the ping status.
Number of The number of images not
(4)
reserved images sent to the host is displayed.
Switches between [ON] and
[OFF] of host output.
Outputs when set to [ON], and
does not output to the host
Output switch
(5) when set to [OFF] and the
button

Chapter 6
output reservation (queue) re-
mains in this device. Switches
between [ON] and [OFF] every
time the button is pressed.
Output reservations (queues)
Output reserva-
(6) remaining in this device are
tion list
displayed.
Deletes output reservations
being displayed in the output
reservation list. Select an out-
put reservation displayed in the
Delete button,
output reservation list and press
(7) Select All button,
[Delete] to delete. To delete all
Clear All button
output reservations, press [Se-
lect All] and then press [Delete].
When [Clear All] is pressed, the
selection is released.
To switch the output des-
tination to backup, select
Primary/Second-
(8) [Secondary]. [Secondary] is
ary button
displayed only for the num-
ber of connected devices.
(9) Back button Closes the screen.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Change the output destination only after fully under-
standing the operation status of the system. It may
cause output of an image to the same host twice, or
may disable output to the image diagnosis host.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

155
6.9 Functions of the system monitor screen

6.9.5 Printer status 6.9.6 Status of JM

The status of printers connected to this device can be The status of the JM connected to this device can be
confirmed. confirmed.

(1)
(1)
(4)
(2) (5)
(2) (4)
(6)
(5)
(7) (3)
(3) (6)
(8)
(7)
(9)

Number Name Functions Number Name Functions


Printer informa- The printer name, printer type and The JM name and error
(1) (1) JM information
tion error description are displayed. description are displayed.
Printer IP address, port num- IP address, ping status of
(2) Status ber, AE title, ping status, and (2) Status JM, and device status are
device condition are displayed. displayed.
(3) Ping button Press to confirm the ping status. Press to confirm the ping
(3) Ping button
Number of . The number of images not status.
(4)
reserved images sent to the printer is displayed. In the case of bar code regis-
Switches between [ON] and [OFF] tration operation, displays
of printer output. Outputs when the status of registered bar
set to [ON], and does not output (4) JOB code (CR cassette). Displays
Output switch to printer when set to [OFF] and registration date and time,
(5)
button the output reservation (queue) will REGIUS, bar code, and
remain in this device. Switches status.
between [ON] and [OFF] every
time the button is pressed. Delete Reading
(5) Stops read status.
button
Output reservations (queues)
Output reserva- Switches between standard
(6) remaining in this device are
tion list JM and backup JM. When
displayed. Standard/.
(6) the standard JM is working
Deletes output reservations Backup button
normally, it is not possible to
being displayed in the output
switch to the backup JM.
Delete button, . reservation list. Select a
displayed output reservation (7) Back button Closes the screen.
Select All .
and press [Delete] to delete.
(7) button,.
To delete all output reserva-
Clear All button
tions, press [Select All] and IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
then press [Delete]. When
• Normally [Delete Reading] is not used. Use this when
[Clear All] is pressed, the
selection is released. although an image is not being read, the message
"This image is being prepared for reading, and cannot
To switch the output des- be viewed. View after reading is completed or can-
tination to backup, select celled." is displayed, and you cannot move to another
Primary/Second-
(8) [Secondary]. [Secondary] is screen.
ary button
displayed only for the num-
ber of connected devices. •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

(9) Back button Closes the screen.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• To keep output reservations (queues) intentionally in
this device, set the output reservation to [OFF]. Delete
unwanted queues among the accumulated queues,
then switch the setting to [ON] so that only necessary
queues can be printed.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

156
6.9 Functions of the system monitor screen

6.9.7 Status of RIS-IN 6.9.8 Status of RIS-OUT

The status of higher systems connected to this device The status of higher systems connected to this device
can be confirmed. can be confirmed.

(1)
(1)
(4)
(2) (5)
(2)
(6)
(3) (4)
(7)
(5) (3)
(8)
(9)

Number Name Functions Number Name Functions


RIS-IN informa- The higher system name and RIS-OUT infor- The higher system name and
(1) (1)
tion error description are displayed. mation error description are displayed.
Higher system IP address, Higher system IP address, port
port number, AE title, ping (2) Status number, AE title, ping status, and
(2) Status device condition are displayed.
status, and device condition
are displayed. (3) Ping button Press to confirm the ping status.
Press to confirm the ping Untransmitted . The number of untransmitted
(3) Ping button (4)
status. examinations examinations is displayed.
Switches between standard Switches between [ON] and
RIS-IN and backup RIS-IN [OFF] of output to a higher sys-
when used normally. When tem. Outputs when set to [ON],
Primary/Second-
(4) the standard RIS-IN is work- and does not output to a higher
ary button Output switch
ing normally, it is not possible (5) system when set to [OFF] and
button

Chapter 6
to switch to the backup RIS- the output reservation (queue)
IN. remains in this device. Switches
between [ON] and [OFF] every
(5) Back button Closes the screen.
time the button is pressed.
Output reservations (queues)
Output reserva-
(6) remaining in this device are
tion list
displayed.
Deletes output reservations be-
ing displayed in the output res-
ervation list. Select a displayed
Delete button,
output reservation and press
Select All .
(7) [Delete] to delete. To delete all
button,
output reservations, press [Se-
Clear All button lect All] and then press [Delete].
When [Clear All] is pressed, the
selected state is released.
Switches between standard
RIS-OUT and backup RIS-OUT
Primary/Second- when used normally. When the
(8)
ary button standard RIS-OUT is working
normally, it is not possible to
switch to the backup RIS-OUT.
(9) Back button Closes the screen.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Because examination status is not output to a higher
system when the switch of output is [OFF], the higher
system cannot manage examination status, and com-
pleted examinations may remain in a list. Do not set
the switch of output to [OFF] except at the time of a
higher system problem.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

157
6.9 Functions of the system monitor screen

6.9.10 Status of examination


6.9.9 EMR Image
sharing (reception)
The information (image) of electronic medical records The status of examination sharing (reception) can be
connected to this device can be confirmed. confirmed.

(1) (1)
(3) (2)
(2) (3) (5)
(4)

(5) (6)

(6) (7)
(4)
(7) (8)

Number Name Functions Number Name Functions


The electronic medical Examination
(1) EMR Image record name, type, and error Examination signal and error
(1) sharing informa-
description are displayed. contents are displayed.
tion
Higher system output path, This device and terminals
(2) Status folder type, and device con-
conducting examination
dition are displayed.
(2) Terminal list sharing are displayed. IP ad-
Untransmitted . The number of untransmitted dress, host name and device
(3)
images images is displayed. condition are displayed.
Switches between [ON] and This is displayed for each
[OFF] of output to an elec- Reception queue terminal. If [ON], reception
tronic medical record. Out- (3)
button queue processing is con-
puts when set to [ON], and ducted; if [OFF], it is not.
does not output to an elec-
Output switch
(4) tronic medical record when Press to confirm the ping
button (4) Ping button
set to [OFF] and the output status.
reservation (queue) remains
Switches between [ON] and
in this device. Switches be-
tween [ON] and [OFF] every [OFF] of reception queue for
time the button is pressed. all terminals. If [ON] is set,
reception queue process-
Output reservations (queues) Queue switch
Output reserva- (5) ing is conducted; if [OFF]
(5) remaining in this device are button
tion list is set, it is not. The device
displayed.
switches between [ON] and
Deletes output reservations [OFF] every time the button
being displayed in the output is pressed.
reservation list. Select a
Delete button, displayed output reservation Reception queues for all ter-
Reception queue
Select All . and press [Delete] to delete. (6) minals including this device
(6) list
button, To delete all output reserva- are displayed.
Clear All button tions, press [Select All] and Deletes queues displayed
then press [Delete]. When
in the reception queue list.
[Clear All] is pressed, the
Select a displayed reception
selected state is released. Delete button,
queue and press [Delete] to
(7) Back button Closes the screen. Select All .
(7) delete. To delete all recep-
button,
tion queues, press [Select
Clear All button
All] and then press [Delete].
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Pressing [Clear All] cancels
• Because exposed images information is not output to the selection.
a higher system when the switch of output is [OFF], (8) Back button Close the screen.
the higher system cannot display the exposed images.
Do not set the switch of output to [OFF] except at the
time of a higher system problem.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

158
6.9 Functions of the system monitor screen

6.9.11 Status of examination


sharing (transmission)
The status of examination sharing (transmission) can
be confirmed.

(1)
(2)
(3) (5)

(6)

(7)
(4)
(8)

Number Name Functions


Examination Examination signal transmis-
(1) sharing informa- sion and error contents are
tion displayed.
This device and terminals
conducting examination
(2) Terminal list sharing are displayed. IP ad-
dress, host name and device
condition are displayed.
This is displayed for each
Transmission terminal. If [ON], transmis-
(3)
queue button sion queue processing is
conducted; if [OFF], it is not.
Press to confirm the ping
(4) Ping button

Chapter 6
status.
Switches between [ON] and
[OFF] of transmission queue
for all terminals. If [ON] is
set, transmission queue pro-
Queue switch
(5) cessing is conducted; if [OFF]
button
is set, it is not. The device
switches between [ON] and
[OFF] every time the button
is pressed.
Transmission queues for
Transmission
(6) all terminals including this
queue list
device are displayed.
Deletes queues displayed in
the transmission queue list.
Select a displayed transmis-
Delete button, .
sion queue and press [De-
Select All .
(7) lete] to delete. To delete all
button,
transmission queues, press
Clear All button
[Select All] and then press
[Delete]. Pressing [Clear All]
cancels the selection.
(8) Back button Close the screen.

159
6.10 Exposure with AeroDR Portable RF Unit

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • State of the net-


Num- Button Precautionary
Name work and con-
• When you restart this device, also restart the AeroDR ber display items
nected devices
Portable RF Unit.
• The network
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • can be discon-
nected and the
IP address can
6.10.1 Screen structure be switched.
• Sometimes a
A network con- maximum 10
Detailed description of tool bar nection error or seconds elapses
data transmis- before the state
The display of following buttons in the tool bar area changes sion error occurs of the button
depending on the status of communication with the host. in a connected changes. When
device such as disconnecting
(1) (2)
RIS/HOST in a the network and
state connected switching the IP
State of the net- to the network, address, stand by
Num- Button Precautionary
Name work and con- but without data 10 seconds, and
ber display items (Red)
nected devices waiting to be make sure that
The network is • After a study is sent. no white point is
disconnected or completed, con- Exposure can rotating around
the output control nect to the net- be continued the button.
of all RIS/HOST work, and send but there will be • A device with a
has been turned data waiting to a data transmis- network connec-
[OFF] manually. It be sent (it is sent sion error. tion error cannot
is possible to con- automatically by send until the
tinue exposures, connecting to error is cleared.
(Gray) but the data is not the network). After the error
sent to RIS/HOST, System is cleared, turn
it is stored in this (1) [OFF]/[ON] the
button
device as data output.
waiting to be sent.
• Do not discon-
• The network nect the network
can be discon- or switch the IP
nected and the address.
IP address can A network con- • When data
be switched. nection error or waiting to be
• Sometimes a maxi- data transmis- sent is in a
mum 10 seconds sion error occurs device whose
The network is
elapses before the in a connected output is [ON],
connected and
state of the button
System there is no data device such as a white point
(1) changes. When
button waiting to be RIS/HOST in a is displayed
(Blue) disconnecting
sent. state connected rotating around
the network and
(Red: to the network, the button, and
switching the IP ad-
rotating and with data is not displayed
dress, stand by 10
seconds, and make white waiting to be when the output
sure that no white point) sent. is [OFF].
point is rotating Exposure can • A device with a
around the button. be continued network connec-
but there will be tion error cannot
• Do not discon- a data transmis- send until the
nect the network sion error. error is cleared.
or switch the IP After the error
address. is cleared, turn
• When data wait- [OFF]/[ON] the
The network is
ing to be sent is output.
connected and
in a device whose
(Blue: there is data Switches between display and hide of the tool bar.
output is [ON], Display/
rotating waiting to be * When the tool bar is hidden, the state of the
a white point is (2) hide but-
white sent. network and connected devices is shown
displayed rotating ton
point) around the button, instead of the system button.
and is not dis-
played when the
output is [OFF].

160
6.10 Exposure with AeroDR Portable RF Unit

System monitor screen (Portable)


This is the screen for switching the AP information and 6.10.2 Exposure preparations
channels built into the AeroDR Portable RF Unit.
(1) The exposure using the AeroDR Portable RF Unit is
performed with the following procedure. The following
(2) procedure is for an example in which a wired connec-
tion is in operation between this device and a higher
(3) system.
(4)
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
(5)
• When this device is being used in the AeroDR Por-
(6)
table RF Unit, charge it when a notification that the
battery level is low is displayed.
Number Name Functions
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Switches between the
Function switch- [Network Status], [Exposure
(1)
ing tab Room], [Warranty Compo- 1 Register the AeroDR Detector in this device
nent], and [Portable] tabs. that is to be used in AeroDR Portable RF Unit.
Displays the AP information • For operation of the AeroDR Detector, refer to
(2) Active AP Info selected through the AeroDR "AeroDR SYSTEM Operation Manual".
Portable RF Unit.
Displays the channel of the AP HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
information selected through • Confirm that the outputs of host, RIS-OUT and printer
the AeroDR Portable RF Unit.
Channel Informa- are [ON] on the system monitor screen (Network Sta-
(3) If multiple pieces of channel
tion tus).
information are displayed,
DFS has been set and one of
the channels is in use. In case of the host
Automatically selects the
(4) Auto CH button
optimum channel.
AP information list registered
in this device. Select an icon

Chapter 6
to switch to an AP information.
(5) Inactive AP List
If there are more than 6 AP
information registered, press
[ ] to scroll sideways.
Starts a utility or shuts down the
system. This is displayed re-
gardless of tabs being selected.
[Utility]: Starts utilities. This * The device switches between [ON] and [OFF] every
button is not dis- time [Output] is pressed.
played if the user • When using a RIS-OUT or printer, confirm the output is
authorization of the
(6) System menu set to [ON] using the same procedure.
logged in operator is
"Technologist". •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
[Update]: Refreshes information.
[Close]: Exits the system
monitor screen, and
the previous screen
is displayed.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The [Portable] tab is displayed when operating the
AeroDR Portable RF Unit.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

161
6.10 Exposure with AeroDR Portable RF Unit

2 Import the examination information to be


used for the exposure using the Portable 6.10.3 Exposure
X-ray diagnostic device.
• Confirm that an Ethernet cable is connected to Prepare for exposure using the AeroDR Portable RF
the device. Unit according to the following procedure.
• Press [Refresh] on the list screen on the device.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Do not disconnect the Ethernet cable while the data is
being transmitted.
• The status of communication with the host is displayed
on the [System] button. For detail, refer to "6.10.1
Screen structure".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

1 When you arrive at the exposure location, turn


on the power of the AeroDR Portable RF Unit.
• The latest examination information is imported • Turn on the power switch of the AeroDR Por-
table RF Unit, and check that the power LED
from the higher system by pressing the [Refresh]
(green) is on.
button.
• For startup operation of the AeroDR Portable RF
Unit, refer to "AeroDR Portable RF Unit Opera-
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • tion Manual".
• To input examination information manually, change the
screen to the patient registration screen.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

3 Remove the Ethernet cable that is con-


nected to the AeroDR Detector registration
hub from the portable X-ray device hub.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
• Confirm that the icon of the AeroDR Detector to be
• When the AeroDR Portable RF Unit is connected to
used in exposure is displayed on the application bar.
this device through a wireless connection, remove the
Ethernet cable from this device.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When the AP information channel is set to [Auto CH],
4 Unplug the power cable from the outlet press [Auto CH] on the system monitor screen (por-
when charging this device. table) and check the channel.
• Wireless connection may take several minutes after
the AeroDR Portable RF Unit is turned on.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
5 Complete the exposure preparations.
• Confirm that the AeroDR Portable RF Unit is
shut down to complete the exposure and move-
2 Select the examination.
ment preparations.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
• It is all right to keep power of this device and the Aero-
DR Detector on.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

• Press the examination to be exposed.

162
6.10 Exposure with AeroDR Portable RF Unit

3 Press [Perform]. 4 Perform exposure.


• Configure the portable X-ray device settings and
check the exposure information before making
an exposure.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When performing an exposure, stay away from the pa-
tient as far as possible before pressing the exposure
switch.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Press the exposure switch

• The exposure screen is displayed. • The exposed image is displayed in the image
display area.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When importing examination information from the IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
higher system and when exposure body part informa- • Do not let the AeroDR Detector vibrate or receive
tion is not imported, select the exposure body part. shock until the exposed image is displayed.
When pressing [Perform] on the body part selection •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Chapter 6
screen, the exposure screen is displayed.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • 5 Adjust the image.
• After exposure, adjust the image as required.

163
6.10 Exposure with AeroDR Portable RF Unit

6 Press [ ] to complete the examination.


6.10.4 Change of the AP
information
When the AP information needs to be changed be-
cause the exposure location has been moved, perform
the following procedure.
The following procedure shows an example of a chan-
nel change from institution (1) to institution (2).
* The numbers ((1) and (2)) on the screen indicate AP
information and AP information icons for institution
(1) and (2). These are shown for ease of explana-
tion, and not displayed on the actual screen.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Make sure to check the following before changing the
channel of the AP information.
– The AeroDR Portable RF Unit is turned on.
– The AeroDR Portable RF Unit has been turned on
for 1 minute or more.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• The initial screen is displayed, and the exposure


1 Press [System] to display the system
monitor screen.
is finished.
• [System] is displayed in the toolbar display area
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • of the patient registration screen, list screen,
body part selection screen, and exposure
• When consolidating image adjustment, press [ ] to
screen.
pause the examination and return to the initial screen.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

7 When exposure is finished, turn the Aero-


DR Portable RF Unit off.
• Turn off the power switch of the AeroDR Por-
table RF Unit, and check that the power LED
(green/orange) is off.
• For shutdown operation of the AeroDR Portable
RF Unit, refer to the "AeroDR Portable RF Unit
Operation Manual".

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Image adjustment can be done on the exposure
screen. However, if a more advanced image adjust-
ment is required, perform image adjustment on the
viewer screen. For details on the viewer screen, refer
to "6.6 Functions of the viewer screen".
• When moving the exposure location, turn off the
AeroDR Portable RF Unit. After moving the exposure
location, perform the procedure again from step 1.
• It is all right to keep power of this device and the Aero-
DR Detector on. • The system monitor screen is displayed.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

164
6.10 Exposure with AeroDR Portable RF Unit

2 Press the [Portable] tab. 4 Press [OK].

• Press [Cancel] to return to the previous screen.

• The portable screen is displayed.


• The AP information change process begins.
3 Select the icon of the AP information to be • The change process takes several minutes.
changed from the [Inactive AP List] icons.

Chapter 6
• When the change process is completed, a con-
firmation screen is displayed. Press [OK].

• A confirmation screen is displayed.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When automatic channel selection is set, pressing • Confirm that the icons and channels of the [Active
[Auto CH] sets the optimum channel automatically. AP Info] and [Channel Information] have changed.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • • If multiple pieces of channel information are dis-
played, DFS has been set and one of the chan-
nels in use.

165
6.10 Exposure with AeroDR Portable RF Unit

5 Press [Close].
6.10.5 Operations after
exposure
When the exposure is completed, move the portable
X-ray device and send the image data, etc. saved in
this device to the higher system. The following proce-
dure is for an example in which a wired connection is
in operation between this device and a higher system.

1 Connect the Ethernet cable that is con-


nected to the AeroDR Detector registra-
tion hub, to the portable X-ray device hub.
• On connection, the icon of [System] will change.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Do not disconnect the Ethernet cable while the data is
being transmitted.
• The status of communication with the host is displayed
on the [System] button. For detail, refer to "6.10.1
Screen structure".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• The display returns to the initial screen. HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••


• When the AeroDR Portable RF Unit is connected to
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • this device through a wireless connection, connect the
• Do not turn off the AeroDR Portable RF Unit during the Ethernet cable to this device.
channel change process. •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
2 Plug the power cable into the outlet to
charge this device.
• Set the icon type and name of the information icon
during installation. HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
• Also charge the AeroDR Detector, AeroDR Portable
RF Unit, and portable X-ray device as required.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

166
6.10 Exposure with AeroDR Portable RF Unit

6.10.6 Change of the IP ad-


dress of the connected
institution network
The procedure to change the IP address of the institu-
tion network to which you are connecting is as follows.
The procedure for switching from [Area1] to [Area2] is
described below as an example.
• The area selection screen is displayed.

1 Press [ ] on the list screen.


3 Press the button corresponding to the de-
sired area name.

• Press [Cancel] to return to the previous screen.

Chapter 6
• The area selection button is displayed.

• On completing the change, the system returns


2 Press the area selection button. to the list screen.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When there is data which has not yet been transmit-
ted, a confirmation screen appears.

→ Press [OK] to execute the change in IP address.


→Press [Cancel] to close the area selection screen
and return to the list screen. After transmitting the
data, please change the IP address.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

167
6.10 Exposure with AeroDR Portable RF Unit

6.10.7 Other functions of AeroDR


Portable RF Unit
Depending on the settings, RIS details can be checked
by starting Internet Explorer. The procedure is ex-
plained using the list screen as an example.

1 Press [RIS LINK] on the patient registra-


tion screen or the list screen.

→ Internet Explorer starts.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• URLs that can be displayed in Internet Explorer are
only those beginning with http or https.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

168
6.11 Exposure with AeroDR Portable UF Unit

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••


• When you restart this device, also restart the AeroDR • The control panel (Aero Sync) is only displayed when
Portable UF Unit. operating with the AeroDR Portable UF Unit.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

6.11.1 Screen structure Detailed description of tool bar


The display of following buttons in the tool bar area
changes depending on the status of communication
with the host.
Exposure screen
(1) (2)
This is the control panel for performing exposure using
the AeroDR Portable UF Unit.
State of the net-
Num- Button Precautionary
Name work and con-
ber display items
nected devices
The network is • After a study is
(1)
disconnected or completed, con-
the output control nect to the net-
of all RIS/HOST work, and send
(2) has been turned data waiting to
[OFF] manually. It be sent (it is sent
is possible to con- automatically by
tinue exposures, connecting to
(Gray) but the data is the network).
Num-
Name Functions not sent to RIS/
ber
HOST, it is stored
X-ray de- in this device as
tection level Select the X-ray detection level during data waiting to be
(1)
switching exposure. sent.
area
• The network

Chapter 6
Messages and buttons are displayed in this can be discon-
area depending on the operation status. nected and the
When the [AeroSync Button] is ON on IP address can
the [Exposure Room] tab on the system be switched.
monitor screen • Sometimes a maxi-
Exposure permission waiting mum 10 seconds
screen The network is
elapses before the
The device is waiting for permis- connected and
state of the button
sion for exposure. The screen System there is no data
(1) changes. When
changes to the ready-to-expose button waiting to be
(Blue) disconnecting
screen if you press [AeroSync]. sent.
the network and
Ready-to-expose screen switching the IP ad-
The screen is locked as it is dress, stand by 10
ready to be captured. To cancel seconds, and make
exposure, press [Cancel], then sure that no white
Message/
the screen returns to the expo- point is rotating
(2) Button
sure permission waiting screen. around the button.
area
When the [AeroSync Button] is OFF on
• Do not discon-
the [Exposure Room] tab on the system
nect the network
monitor screen
or switch the IP
Ready-to-expose screen address.
The screen is locked as it is • When data wait-
ready to be captured. To suspend The network is ing to be sent
exposure, press [Pause], then connected and is in a device
the screen returns to the expo- there is data whose output
(Blue:
sure permission waiting screen. waiting to be is [ON], a white
rotating
Exposure resumption waiting sent. point is displayed
white
screen rotating around
point)
The device is waiting for expo- the button, and
sure to be resumed. The screen is not displayed
changes to the ready-to-expose when the output
screen if you press [Restart]. is [OFF].

169
6.11 Exposure with AeroDR Portable UF Unit

State of the net-


System monitor screen (Portable)
Num- Button Precautionary
Name work and con-
ber display items This is the screen for switching the AP information and
nected devices
channels built into the AeroDR Portable UF Unit.
• The network
can be discon- (1)
nected and the
(2)
IP address can
be switched.
• Sometimes a (3)
A network con- maximum 10
nection error or seconds elapses (4)
data transmis- before the state (5)
sion error occurs of the button
in a connected changes. When (6)
device such as disconnecting
RIS/HOST in a the network and Number Name Functions
state connected switching the IP
Switches between the
to the network, address, stand by
Function switch- [Network Status], [Exposure
but without data 10 seconds, and (1)
(Red) ing tab Room], [Warranty Compo-
waiting to be make sure that
nent], and [Portable] tabs.
sent. no white point is
Exposure can rotating around Displays the AP information
be continued the button. (2) Active AP Info selected through the AeroDR
but there will be • A device with a Portable UF Unit.
a data transmis- network connec- Displays the channel of the
sion error. tion error cannot AP information selected
send until the through the AeroDR Portable
error is cleared. Channel Informa- UF Unit.
After the error (3)
tion If multiple pieces of channel
System is cleared, turn information are displayed,
(1) [OFF]/[ON] the
button DFS has been set and one
output. of the channels is in use.
• Do not discon- Automatically selects the
nect the network (4) Auto CH button
optimum channel.
or switch the IP
address. AP information list registered
A network con- • When data in this device. Select an icon
nection error or waiting to be to switch to an AP informa-
data transmis- sent is in a (5) Inactive AP List tion. If there are more than
sion error occurs device whose 6 AP information registered,
in a connected output is [ON], press [ ] to scroll
device such as a white point sideways.
RIS/HOST in a is displayed Starts a utility or shuts down
state connected rotating around the system. This is displayed
(Red: to the network, the button, and regardless of tabs being
rotating and with data is not displayed selected.
white waiting to be when the output [Utility]: Starts utilities. This
point) sent. is [OFF]. button is not dis-
Exposure can • A device with a played if the user
be continued network connec- authorization of the
(6) System menu
but there will be tion error cannot logged in operator is
a data transmis- send until the "Technologist".
sion error. error is cleared. [Update]: Refreshes informa-
After the error tion.
is cleared, turn [Close]: Exits the system
[OFF]/[ON] the monitor screen, and
output. the previous screen
Switches between display and hide of the tool bar. is displayed.
Display/
* When the tool bar is hidden, the state of the
(2) hide but-
network and connected devices is shown
ton HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
instead of the system button.
• The [Portable] tab is displayed when operating the
AeroDR Portable UF Unit.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

170
6.11 Exposure with AeroDR Portable UF Unit

2 Import the examination information to be


6.11.2 Exposure preparations used for the exposure using the Portable
X-ray diagnostic device.
Make the following preparations when exposing using • Confirm that an Ethernet cable is connected to
the AeroDR Portable UF Unit. The following procedure the device.
is for an example in which a wired connection is in op- • Press [Refresh] on the list screen on the device.
eration between this device and a higher system.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When this device is being used in the AeroDR Por-
table UF Unit, charge it when a notification that the
battery level is low is displayed.
• Check the settings for the initial detection level and
AeroSync button on the system monitor screen.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

1 Register the AeroDR Detector in this de- • The latest examination information is imported
vice that is to be used in AeroDR Portable from the higher system by pressing the [Refresh]
button.
UF Unit.
• For operation of the AeroDR Detector, refer to
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
"AeroDR SYSTEM Operation Manual".
• To input examination information manually, change the
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • screen to the patient registration screen.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When an AeroDR Detector which does not support
Aero Sync mode is used, an error message appears
and registration will not be permitted. 3 Remove the Ethernet cable connected to
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • the AeroDR Detector registration side hub
from this device.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

Chapter 6
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• Confirm that the outputs of host, RIS-OUT and printer
are [ON] on the system monitor screen (Network Sta- • When this device is connected to the AeroDR Por-
tus). table UF Unit through wired connection, remove the
Ethernet cable connected to the AeroDR Detector reg-
In case of the host istration side hub from the Portable X-ray diagnostic
device side hub.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

4 Unplug the power cable from the outlet


when charging this device.

5 Complete the exposure preparations.


• Confirm that the AeroDR Portable UF Unit is
shut down to complete the exposure and move-
* The device switches between [ON] and [OFF] every ment preparations.
time [Output] is pressed.
• When using a RIS-OUT or printer, confirm the output is HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
set to [ON] using the same procedure.
• It is all right to keep power of this device and the Aero-
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
DR Detector on.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

171
6.11 Exposure with AeroDR Portable UF Unit

2 Select the examination.


6.11.3 Exposure

Prepare for exposure using the AeroDR Portable UF


Unit according to the following procedure. The proce-
dure varies depending on the setting of the [AeroSync
Button] on the [Exposure Room] tab on the system
monitor screen.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Press the examination to be exposed.
• Do not disconnect the Ethernet cable while the data is
being transmitted.
• The status of communication with the host is displayed
on the [System] button. For detail, refer to "6.11.1
3 Press [Perform].
Screen structure".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

When the [AeroSync Button] is OFF

1 When you arrive at the exposure location,


turn on the power of the AeroDR Portable
UF Unit.
• Turn on the power switch of the AeroDR Por-
table UF Unit and confirm that the (green) power
LED is ON.
• For startup operation of the AeroDR Portable UF
Unit, refer to "AeroDR Portable UF Unit Opera-
tion Manual".

• The exposure screen is displayed.


• A message "Ready to expose" is displayed in
the message/button area, then the screen is
• Confirm that the icon of the AeroDR Detector to locked.
be used in exposure is displayed on the applica- • To change the X-ray detection level, press [Sus-
tion bar. pend] to enable modification. After changing the
detection level, press [Resume], then the mes-
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • sage "Ready to expose" is displayed.
• When the AP information channel is set to [Auto CH],
press [Auto CH] on the system monitor screen (por- IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
table) and check the channel. • When the detection level [M] or [L] is selected, mal-
• It may take several minutes for wireless connection to function may be caused by a shock to the AeroDR De-
start after turning on the AeroDR Portable UF Unit. tector. In such cases, set the [AeroSync Button] ON
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • on the system monitor screen.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

172
6.11 Exposure with AeroDR Portable UF Unit

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 5 Adjust the image.


• After exposure, adjust the image as required.
• When importing examination information from the
higher system and when exposure body part informa-
tion is not imported, select the exposure body part.
When pressing [Perform] on the body part selection
screen, the exposure screen is displayed.
• When you move the focus in the image display area
on the exposure resumption waiting screen to cap-
ture an image of another body part, not the ready-to-
expose screen but the exposure resumption waiting
screen is displayed.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
6 Press [ ] to complete the examination.
4 Perform exposure.
• Configure the portable X-ray device settings and
check the exposure information before making
an exposure.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When performing an exposure, stay away from the pa-
tient as far as possible before pressing the exposure
switch.
• When the "Ready" is displayed, immediately perform
exposure.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

Press the exposure switch

Chapter 6
• The initial screen is displayed, and the exposure
is finished.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• As soon as the exposed image is transferred, • When consolidating image adjustment, press [ ] to
the image is displayed in the image display area. pause the examination and return to the initial screen.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Do not let the AeroDR Detector vibrate or receive
shock until the exposed image is displayed.
7 When exposure is finished, turn the Aero-
DR Portable UF Unit off.
• If image acquisition started without performing ex-
• Turn off the power switch of the AeroDR Por-
posure, this may result in incorrect detection due to
table UF Unit and confirm that the power LED
noise, etc. Perform blurring (image deletion) and re-
(green/orange) is OFF.
peat exposure.
• For shutdown operation of the AeroDR Portable
• If image acquisition does not start after exposure, the
UF Unit, refer to the "AeroDR Portable UF Unit
voltage may not be enough. Check the exposure con-
Operation Manual".
ditions and repeat exposure.
• W hen exposure is done while "Ready" is not dis-
played, have an interval of 1 minute or more before
repeating exposure.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

173
6.11 Exposure with AeroDR Portable UF Unit

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 2 Select the examination.


• Image adjustment can be done on the portable de-
vice's [Image Proc] tab. However, if a more advanced
image adjustment is required, perform image adjust-
ment on the [Image Proc] tab or the viewer screen.
For details on the viewer screen, refer to "6.6 Func-
tions of the viewer screen".
• When moving the exposure location, turn off the
AeroDR Portable UF Unit. After moving the exposure
location, perform the procedure again from step 1.
• It is all right to keep power of this device and the Aero- • Press the examination to be exposed.
DR Detector on.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
3 Press [Perform].

When the [AeroSync Button] is ON

1 When you arrive at the exposure location,


turn on the power of the AeroDR Portable
UF Unit.
• Turn on the power switch of the AeroDR Por-
table UF Unit and confirm that the (green) power
LED is ON.
• For startup operation of the AeroDR Portable UF
Unit, refer to "AeroDR Portable UF Unit Opera-
tion Manual".

• Confirm that the icon of the AeroDR Detector to • The exposure screen is displayed.
be used in exposure is displayed on the applica- • A message "Waiting for exposure permission" is
tion bar. displayed in the image display area.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••


• When the AP information channel is set to [Auto CH], • If the information about the body part is not imported
press [Auto CH] on the system monitor screen (por- while importing examination information from the high-
table) and check the channel. er system, select the body part to be imaged. Then
• It may take several minutes for wireless connection to press [Perform] on the body part selection screen to
start after turning on the AeroDR Portable UF Unit. display the exposure screen.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

174
6.11 Exposure with AeroDR Portable UF Unit

4 After positioning the patient, check the X- HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••


ray detection level, then press [AeroSync]. • In AeroDR Portable UF Unit exposure, X-rays with
• If the control panel does not switch to
default intensity that reached the AeroDR Detector are
[AeroSync], press the [AeroSync] tab.
detected, and image acquisition is started. Select the
X-ray detection level during exposure from the follow-
ing 3 exposure detection levels according to the condi-
tion.
– [H]
Used for general imaging such as that of the chest
and limb bones.
– [M]
This is effective for imaging of the abdomen or
lumbar front of patients with thick bodies as well
• Change the X-ray detection level to [M] or [L] as as in the case where the direct X-ray region does
needed. not enter the AeroDR Detector because of the nar-
• After checking the X-ray detection level, press rowed exposure field. Be careful not to subject the
[AeroSync]. AeroDR Detector to strong shocks during expo-
sure.
– [L]
This is more effective than the medium sensitivity
for imaging of the abdomen or lumbar front of pa-
tients with thick bodies as well as in the case where
the direct X-ray region does not enter the AeroDR
Detector because of the narrowed exposure field.
Let the patient stand still as far as possible during
exposure.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

5 Perform exposure.
• A message "Ready" is displayed in the mes- • Configure the portable X-ray device settings and

Chapter 6
sage/button area. The screen is locked. check the exposure information before making
• The screen is locked. To return to the previous an exposure.
screen to change the position of the patient,
etc., press [Cancel]. IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When performing an exposure, stay away from the pa-
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • tient as far as possible before pressing the exposure
• To prevent mistaken operations, always press switch.
[AeroSync] and check that "Ready" is displayed. • When the "Ready" is displayed, immediately perform
• For the conditions for changing the detection level, exposure.
follow the result of the installation survey, since they •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
depend on the X-ray device to be used.
Press the exposure switch
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

• As soon as the exposed image is transferred,


the image is displayed in the image display area.

175
6.11 Exposure with AeroDR Portable UF Unit

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •


• Do not let the AeroDR Detector vibrate or receive • When consolidating image adjustment, press [ ] to
shock until the exposed image is displayed. pause the examination and return to the initial screen.
• If image acquisition started without performing ex- •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
posure, this may result in incorrect detection due to
noise, etc. Perform blurring (image deletion) and re-
peat exposure.
8 When exposure is finished, turn the Aero-
• If image acquisition does not start after exposure, the
DR Portable UF Unit off.
• Turn off the power switch of the AeroDR Por-
voltage may not be enough. Check the exposure con-
table UF Unit and confirm that the power LED
ditions and repeat exposure.
(green/orange) is OFF.
• W hen exposure is done while "Ready" is not dis-
• For shutdown operation of the AeroDR Portable
played, have an interval of 1 minute or more before
UF Unit, refer to the "AeroDR Portable UF Unit
repeating exposure.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
Operation Manual".

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
6 Adjust the image. • Image adjustment can be done on the portable de-
• After exposure, adjust the image as required. vice's [Image Proc] tab. However, if a more advanced
image adjustment is required, perform image adjust-
ment on the [Image Proc] tab or the viewer screen.
For details on the viewer screen, refer to "6.6 Func-
tions of the viewer screen".
• When moving the exposure location, turn off the
AeroDR Portable UF Unit. After moving the exposure
location, perform the procedure again from step 1.
• It is all right to keep power of this device and the Aero-
DR Detector on.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
7 Press [ ] to complete the examination.

• The initial screen is displayed, and the exposure


is finished.

176
6.11 Exposure with AeroDR Portable UF Unit

6.11.4 Change of the AP 2 Press the [Portable] tab.

information
When the AP information needs to be changed be-
cause the exposure location has been moved, perform
the following procedure.
The following procedure shows an example of a chan-
nel change from institution (1) to institution (2).
* The numbers ((1) and (2)) on the screen indicate AP
information and AP information icons for institution
(1) and (2). These are shown for ease of explana-
tion, and not displayed on the actual screen.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Make sure to check the following before changing the
channel of the AP information.
– The AeroDR Portable UF Unit is turned on.
– The AeroDR Portable UF Unit has been turned on
for 1 minute or more.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

1 Press [System] to display the system • The portable screen is displayed.


monitor screen.
• [System] is displayed in the toolbar display area
of the patient registration screen, list screen,
3 Select the icon of the AP information to be
body part selection screen, and exposure
changed from the [Inactive AP List] icons.
screen.

Chapter 6

• A confirmation screen is displayed.

• The system monitor screen is displayed. HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••


• When automatic channel selection is set, pressing
[Auto CH] sets the optimum channel automatically.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

177
6.11 Exposure with AeroDR Portable UF Unit

4 Press [OK]. 5 Press [Close].

• Press [Cancel] to return to the previous screen.

• The AP information change process begins.


• The change process takes several minutes. • The display returns to the initial screen.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Do not turn off the AeroDR Portable UF Unit during the
channel change process.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• Set the icon type and name of the information icon
during installation.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• When the change process is completed, a con-


firmation screen is displayed. Press [OK].

• Confirm that the icons and channels of the [Active


AP Info] and [Channel Information] have changed.
• If multiple pieces of channel information are dis-
played, DFS has been set and one of the chan-
nels in use.

178
6.11 Exposure with AeroDR Portable UF Unit

6.11.5 Operations after 6.11.6 Change of the IP ad-


exposure dress of the connected
institution network
When the exposure is completed, move the portable
X-ray device and send the image data, etc. saved in The procedure to change the IP address of the institu-
this device to the higher system. The following proce- tion network to which you are connecting is as follows.
dure is for an example in which a wired connection is The procedure for switching from [Area1] to [Area2] is
in operation between this device and a higher system. described below as an example.

1 Connect the Ethernet cable connected to


the AeroDR Detector registration side hub 1 Press [ ] on the list screen.
to this device.
• On connection, the icon of [System] will change.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Do not disconnect the Ethernet cable while the data is
being transmitted.
• The status of communication with the host is displayed
on the [System] button. For detail, refer to "6.11.1
Screen structure".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When this device is connected to the AeroDR Portable
UF Unit through wired connection, connect the Ether-
net cable connected to the AeroDR Detector registra-
tion side hub to the Portable X-ray diagnostic device
side hub.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

Chapter 6
2 Plug the power cable into the outlet to
charge this device.
• The area selection button is displayed.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Also charge the AeroDR Detector, AeroDR Portable
UF Unit, and portable X-ray device as required.
2 Press the area selection button.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

179
6.11 Exposure with AeroDR Portable UF Unit

6.11.7 Other functions of AeroDR


Portable UF Unit
Depending on the settings, RIS details can be checked
by starting Internet Explorer. The procedure is ex-
plained using the list screen as an example.

1 Press [RIS LINK] on the patient registra-


• The area selection screen is displayed. tion screen or the list screen.

3 Press the button corresponding to the de-


sired area name.

→ Internet Explorer starts.

• Press [Cancel] to return to the previous screen. HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••


• URLs that can be displayed in Internet Explorer are
only those beginning with http or https.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• On completing the change, the system returns


to the list screen.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When there is data which has not yet been transmit-
ted, a confirmation screen appears.

→ Press [OK] to execute the change in IP address.


→Press [Cancel] to close the area selection screen
and return to the list screen. After transmitting the
data, please change the IP address.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

180
6.12 Manual stitching exposure

Viewer screen (for stitching combination


6.12.1 Screen structure position adjustment)
This is the screen for adjusting combined position of
images taken manually with stitching exposure.
Exposure screen
(4)
This is the screen for manual stitching exposure. (1)
(5)
(2)
(2)
(1) (6)
(3) (3)
(4)
(5)

(6) (7)
(7)
(8)
(8) (9)
(9)
Number Name Functions
Selects the screen display
Number Name Functions Display layout
(1) format from 1x1, 2x1, and
(1) Order list List of exposures. toggle button
2x2 display options.
Combined image The images for combination Switches and displays the
(2) are displayed. Focus is dis- plate overlap sequence when
display area played on selected images.
checking the combination
This button is for selecting the Overlap button position. Switches to stan-
image which will be the image (2) (standard/re- dard or reversed every time
shade standard among the im-
Standard grada- versed) it is pressed. The switching
ages displayed in the combined
(3) is for display only and does
tion button image display area. You can only
select 1 image. not affect the overlapping se-
: Not selected quence during combination.

Chapter 6
: Selected
Displays and hides the stitch-
(3) Adjust button
Gathers multiple exposure ing adjustment panel.
Selection button images associated with the
(4) images selected in the order Resets the position of the
(batch selection) list and displays them in the moved image and the
(4) Reset button
combined image display area. changed density to return
Selection button them to their initial states.
Displays the selected images
(5) (individual selec- in the order list in the com- All images to be combined
bined image display area. (5) Full preview
tion) are displayed.
Deletes the images selected in the Adjust the density of the im-
(6) Delete button Part correction
combined image display area. (6) ages by pressing [ ] or
button
Combination Moves the position of images dragging the bar.
(7) sequence switch selected in the combined im- Moves the position of select-
button age display area. ed images and adjusts their
Combines the images displayed angles.
in the combined image display Move/rotate but- : im-
(7)
(8) Stitching button area. Press this button to dis- ton age position is moved toward
play the stitching combination each direction.
position adjustment screen. : image
Performs re-adjustment of the angles are adjusted.
combination position. This button
(9) Adjust button Magnification Ra- Display images are magnified/
cannot be pressed when com-
bined images are not displayed. (8) tio button/Magnifi- shrunk by pressing [
cation Ratio bar ] or dragging the bar.
Applies the adjusted image
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • (9) Apply button
combination position.
• Adjustments to the combination position of images that
underwent stitching exposure are performed on the
viewer screen (for stitching combination position adjust-
ment). For details, refer to "6.12.3 Image combination".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

181
6.12 Manual stitching exposure

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • About image display

Moving/rotating an image during image • During the image combination, the combined parts
combination (frame parts) displayed in the full preview are mag-
nified and displayed in the image display area as
• For image movement/rotation, the lower image be- frames.
comes the work image. Also, the movement/rotation • The display format and magnified displayed part are
action is as follows. as follows:

OO Moving 1×1 display


[ ][ ][ ][ ]:
Moves the image to direction
pressed

The image can also be moved by


dragging the center of the image
(horizontal stripe portion).

OO Rotating 2×1 display


[ ]: Lowers the upper left
edge of the image
[ ]: Raises the upper left
edge of the image
[ ]: Lowers the upper right
edge of the image
[ ]: Raises the upper right
edge of the image

If you drag the left or right area of the image (horizontal


2×2 display
stripe portion) vertically, you can move the upper edge
up or down in the direction you are dragging it. If you
drag it horizontally, you can move the image horizon-
tally.

Linking 3 images
• When combining 3 images, the lower image will also
move/rotate if the central image is moved/rotated.



• A 2×2 display can only be selected when combining 3


images.
• Set the plate overlap sequence during installation.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

182
6.12 Manual stitching exposure

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
6.12.2 Exposure • It is also possible to register multiple exposure body
parts in 1 set key.
The manual stitching exposure method is as follows. •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 2 Press [Perform].


• For the stitching exposure images, make sure that the
combined parts are combined in the correct positions.
• If there is gap between combined images, manually
adjust the image position of the combined parts using
the viewer screen (for stitching combination position
adjustment). It is also recommended that you arrange a
measure in the combined image part during exposure
to confirm the combined parts easier.
• In stitching exposure, images can be combined when
all the following conditions are met.
– All exposures are done using AeroDR Detectors
(CR cassettes) of the same size
– All exposures are done using an AeroDR Detector
or a CR cassette
– Perform exposure after standardizing the read
resolution
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

1 After transitioning from the initial screen


to the exposure body part selection
screen, select the set key for stitching ex-
posure.

Chapter 6
• The exposure screen is displayed.

3 Perform exposure.
• Configure the X-ray device settings and check the
exposure information before making an exposure.
• Select 2 or 3 set keys for stitching exposure.
Press the exposure switch of
the X-ray device

• The selected set keys are displayed on the ex-


posure conditions list.
• Exposed image is displayed.
• Perform the subsequent exposures with same
procedure.

183
6.12 Manual stitching exposure

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
6.12.3 Image combination • [ ] and [ ] can be pressed only when the set
key for stitching exposure is selected.
Combine the exposed images. The following proce- •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
dure describes an example of combining 3 images.
2 Press [Stitching].
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When adjusting the image position of the combined part
manually, mark the characteristic structures (or scale) of
the subject in the image. Use the marker as a supplemen-
tary standard when performing manual combinations.
• In stitching exposure, when plates overlap and are ar-
ranged so that there is no image loss in each plate's
boundaries, there might be a slight gap in the marker
position because of a minute difference in magnifica-
tion. After taking this into account, confirm the combi-
nation position through the marker.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

1 Select the images to be combined.

• Select the images to be combined from the or- • The viewer screen (for stitching combination po-
der list and press [ ] or [ ]. sition adjustment) is displayed.

3 Select the frame which will adjust the im-


age combination position.

• The selected images are displayed in the com-


bined image display area. • Focus is applicable to the frame so you will be
• If you pressed [ ], continuously select the able to make adjustments.
associated images (second and third).

184
6.12 Manual stitching exposure

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 6 Press [Back].


• For the frame display format, 1×1, 2×1, and 2×2
display options can be selected.
• A 2×2 frame display can only be selected when
combining 3 images.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

4 Adjust the image combination position.

• For details on how to operate the viewer screen


(for stitching combination position adjustment),
refer to "6.12.1 Screen structure".
• Select another frame and adjust the combina-
tion position as needed.

5 Once all combination positions are ad-


justed, press [Apply]. • Returns to the exposure screen.
• The combined image is added to the order list.
• If you press [Adjust] , the viewer screen (for
stitching combination position adjustment) will

Chapter 6
be displayed. The combination position can then
be readjusted.

7 Press [ ].

• The image combination position is confirmed.

• The combined image is output.

185
6.12 Manual stitching exposure

6.12.4 Image adjustment

The adjustment method for the combined image is as


follows.

1 Display the combined image and press


[Viewer].

• The initial screen is displayed.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• If outputting the combined image in sections, set the
number of sections by [number of combination output
sheets.]
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

• The viewer screen is displayed.


• Perform various image adjustments. For details
on how to operate the viewer screen, refer to
"3.6 Viewer screen".

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For images that underwent stitching exposure, you will
have the following limitations when adjusting the im-
ages.
– ROI adjustment is not possible.
– Automatic recognition of the exposure field is not
possible (manual adjustment is possible).
– If the effective image area is changed, only the im-
age size will change.
– Automatic calculation of masking is not possible.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

186
6.12 Manual stitching exposure

2 Press [Return] when image adjustment is


completed.

• The exposure screen is displayed.

Chapter 6

187
6.13 Auto stitching exposure with AeroDR Detector

Viewer screen (for stitching combination


6.13.1 Screen structure position adjustment)
This is the screen for adjusting combined position of
images taken with stitching exposure with the AeroDR
Exposure screen Detector.

This is the screen for auto stitching exposure with (4)


AeroDR Detector. (1)
(5)

(2) (2)
(3) (6)
(1)
(3)
(4)
(5) (7)

(8)
(6) (9)
(7)
(8) Number Name Functions
Selects the screen display
Display layout
Number Name Functions (1) format from 1x1, 2x1, and
toggle button
2x2 display options.
List of exposures. Exam.
(1) Order list Tags are grouped for each Switches and displays the
examination. plate overlap sequence when
checking the combination
The images for combination Overlap button position. Switches to stan-
are displayed. Focus is dis- (2) (standard/re- dard or reversed every time
Combined image
(2) played on selected images. In versed) it is pressed. The switching
display area
the case of 2 exposures, "x" is is for display only and does
displayed in the area at the top. not affect the overlapping se-
This button is for select- quence during combination.
ing the image which will be Displays and hides the stitch-
the image shade standard (3) Adjust button
ing adjustment panel.
among the images displayed
Standard grada- Resets the position of the
(3) in the combined image
tion button moved image and the
display area. You can only (4) Reset button
select 1 image. changed density to return
: Not selected them to their initial states.
: Selected All images to be combined
(5) Full preview
are displayed.
Gathers multiple exposure
images associated with the Adjust the density of the im-
Selection button Part correction
(4) images selected in the order (6) ages by pressing [ ] or
(batch selection) button
list and displays them in the dragging the bar.
combined image display area. Moves the position of select-
Selection button Displays the selected images ed images and adjusts their
(5) (individual selec- in the order list in the com- angles.
tion) bined image display area. Move/rotate but- : image
(7)
ton position is moved toward
Number of sheets The number of sheets re-
(6) each direction.
remaining maining is displayed.
: image
Combines the images dis- angles are adjusted.
played in the combined im-
Magnification Ra- Display images are magnified/
age display area. Press this
(7) Stitching button (8) tio button/Magnifi- shrunk by pressing [
button to display the stitching
cation Ratio bar ] or dragging the bar.
combination position adjust-
ment confirmation screen. Applies the adjusted image
(9) Apply button
combination position.
Cancels exposure of the ex-
(8) Cancel button amination. If canceled, images
exposed so far are received.

188
6.13 Auto stitching exposure with AeroDR Detector

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • About image display

Moving/rotating an image during image • During the image combination, the combined parts
combination (frame parts) displayed in the full preview are mag-
nified and displayed in the image display area as
• For image movement/rotation, the lower image be- frames.
comes the work image. The movement/rotation action • The display format and magnified displayed part are
is as follows. as follows:

OO Moving 1×1 display


[ ][ ][ ][ ]:
Moves the image to direction
pressed

The image can also be moved by


dragging the center of the image
(horizontal stripe portion).

OO Rotating 2×1 display


[ ]: Lowers the upper left
edge of the image
[ ]: Raises the upper left
edge of the image
[ ]: Lowers the upper right
edge of the image
[ ]: Raises the upper right
edge of the image

Chapter 6
If you drag the left or right area of the image (horizontal
2×2 display
stripe portion) vertically, you can move the upper edge
up or down in the direction you are dragging it. If you
drag it horizontally, you can move the image horizon-
tally.

Linking 3 images
• When combining 3 images, the lower image will also
move/rotate if the central image is moved/rotated.



• 2x2 display can only be selected when combining 3


images.
• Set the plate overlap sequence during installation.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

189
6.13 Auto stitching exposure with AeroDR Detector

3 Press [Perform].
6.13.2 Exposure

The auto stitching exposure method using AeroDR De-


tector is as follows.

1 Perform exposure preparations for Aero-


DR Stitching System.
• For details, refer to the "AeroDR Stitching Sys-
tem Manual".

2 After transitioning from the initial screen


to the exposure body part selection
screen, select the set key for stitching ex-
posure.

• The exposure screen is displayed.


• Select 2 or 3 set keys for stitching exposure.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• Display of the device icon and message changes ac-
cording to the device status. The meaning of the sta-
tuses to be displayed are listed below.
"Please do the height detection."
AeroDR Stitching Unit is in preparation.

"Please detect radiation field."


Condition of undetected exposure. Detect
exposure field detection.
"Please check a panel"
AeroDR Detector is not set (ready) for mo-
dality to be used for exposure. Set (prepare)
• The selected set keys are displayed on the ex- the AeroDR Detector.
posure conditions list. •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• It is also possible to register multiple exposure body
parts in 1 set key.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

190
6.13 Auto stitching exposure with AeroDR Detector

4 Patients are led before the AeroDR X-ray 7 Expose the second and third.
unit and the X-ray exposure range is set. • Repeat from step 5 to perform exposure.
• Set up the X-ray device before exposure just
like for the first exposure. Perform exposure af-
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
ter checking the exposure conditions.
• If Exam. Tag and exposure field confirmation results
do not match, the following action is performed.
– If exposure field confirmation results are less than
the Exam.Tag, the confirmation screen is displayed.
The Exam. Tag is maintained as is and exposure is
enabled.
– If exposure field confirmation results exceed the
Exam.Tag, an error is displayed. Either reset the
exposure field or add an Exam.Tag on the body
part selection screen.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

5 The exposure ready LED (blue) of the


AeroDR Stitching Unit lights to let you
• Exposed preview image is displayed.
know exposure is enabled.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
6 Exposes the first. • Preview images is first displayed on the exposure
• Set up the X-ray device before exposure. Per- screen. Because signal reception does not start until
form exposure after checking the exposure con- all exposure is complete, it may take a while before
ditions. the image is displayed.
• If [Cancel] is pressed during a single examination, re-
exposure or additional exposure cannot be performed
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • for that examination.
• If you want to discard an image during exposure,
• Make sure the focus matches stitching exposure condi- press [Cancel] followed by [ ].

Chapter 6
tions. • You can perform discard even after all images have
• Always ensure the exposure ready LED (blue) of the been exposed. The target of discard is the image be-
AeroDR Stitching Unit is lit before performing an expo- fore and after combination.
• Blurring any image within a single examination makes
sure. Additionally, do not press the first stage of the ex-
other images also the target for blurring.
posure switch until the exposure ready LED (blue) is lit. •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

Press the exposure switch of


the X-ray device

• Exposed preview image is displayed.

191
6.13 Auto stitching exposure with AeroDR Detector

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
6.13.3 Image combination • [ ] and [ ] can be pressed only when the set
key for stitching exposure is selected.
Images exposed by auto stitching using the AeroDR •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Detector are combined automatically. The following
procedure describes an example of combining 3 im-
ages. 2 Press [Stitching].

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Automatic combination may fail depending on the con-
dition of the exposed image. Always check the com-
bination position visually, and adjust manually when
necessary.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

1 Select the images to be combined.


• Select images only if not already selected.

• Select the images to be combined from the or-


der list and press [ ] or [ ].
• The combination position confirmation screen is
displayed.

3 Press [OK].

• The selected images are displayed in the com-


bined image display area.
• If you pressed [ ], continuously select the • To adjust combination position manually, press
associated images (second and third). [Adjust] and display the viewer screen (for
stitching combination position adjustment). For
information concerning the method of manually
adjusting the combination position, see "6.13.1
Screen structure."
• Press [Cancel] to return to the previous screen.

192
6.13 Auto stitching exposure with AeroDR Detector

6.13.4 Image adjustment

The adjustment method for the combined image is as


follows.

1 Display the combined image and press


[Viewer].

• The combined image is displayed.


• The combined image is added to the order list.

4 Press [ ].

Chapter 6
• The combined image is output.

• The viewer screen is displayed.


• Perform various image adjustments. For details
on how to operate the viewer screen, refer to
"3.6 Viewer Screen".

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For images by stitching exposure, you will have the
following limitations when adjusting the images.
– ROI adjustment is not possible.
– The exposure field automatic recognition function
• The initial screen is displayed. cannot be performed (manual adjustment is pos-
sible).
– If the effective image area is changed, only the im-
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
age size will change.
• If outputting the combined image in sections, set the •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
number of sections by [number of combination output
sheets.]
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

193
6.13 Auto stitching exposure with AeroDR Detector

2 Press [Return] when image adjustment is


completed.

• The exposure screen is displayed.

194
6.14 CR stitching cassette exposure

Viewer screen (for stitching combination


6.14.1 Screen structure position adjustment)

This is the screen for adjusting combined position of


images taken with stitching exposure with CR stitching
Exposure screen cassette.
This is the screen for stitching exposure with CR stitching cassette. (4)
(1)
(2) (5)
(1)
(3) (2)
(4) (3) (6)
(5)

(6)
(7)
(7)
(8) (8)
(9) (9)

Number Name Functions


Number Name Functions Selects the screen display
Display layout
(1) Order list List of exposures (1) format from 1x1, 2x1, and
toggle button
The images for combination 2x2 display options.
Combined image
(2) are displayed. Focus is dis- Switches and displays the
display area played on selected images. plate overlap sequence when
This button is for select- checking the combination
ing the image which will be Overlap button position. Switches to stan-
the image shade standard (2) (standard/re- dard or reversed every time
among the images displayed
Standard grada- versed) it is pressed. The switching
(3) in the combined image
tion button display area. You can only is for display only and does

Chapter 6
select 1 image. not affect the overlapping se-
: Not selected quence during combination.
: Selected
Displays and hides the stitch-
(3) Adjust button
Gathers multiple exposure ing adjustment panel.
Selection button images associated with the
(4) images selected in the order Resets the position of the
(batch selection) list and displays them in the moved image and the
(4) Reset button
combined image display area. changed density to return
Selection button them to their initial states.
Displays the selected images
(5) (individual selec- in the order list in the com- All images to be combined
bined image display area. (5) Full preview
tion) are displayed.
Deletes the images selected in Adjusts the density of the
(6) Delete button Part correction
the combined image display area. (6) image by pressing [ ]
button
Combination Moves the position of the im- or dragging the bar.
(7) sequence switch ages selected in the combined Moves the position of select-
button image display area. ed images and adjusts their
Combines the images displayed angles.
in the combined image dis- Move/rotate but- : image
(8) Stitching button play area. Press this button to (7)
ton position is moved toward
display the stitching combination each direction.
position adjustment screen.
: image
Performs re-adjustment of the angles are adjusted.
combination position. This button
(9) Adjust button Magnification Ra- Display images are magni-
cannot be pressed when com-
bined images are not displayed. (8) tio button/Magnifi- fied/shrunk by pressing [
cation Ratio bar ] or dragging the bar.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Applies the adjusted image


(9) Apply button
combination position.
• Adjustments to the combination position of the stitch-
ing exposure images are performed on the viewer
screen (for stitching combination position adjustment).
For details, refer to "6.14.3 Image combination."
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

195
6.14 CR stitching cassette exposure

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • About image display

Moving/rotating an image during image • During the image combination, the combined parts
combination (frame parts) displayed in the full preview are mag-
nified and displayed in the image display area as
• For image movement/rotation, the lower image is the frames.
operational object. The movement/rotation action is as • The display format and magnified displayed part are
follows. as follows:

OO Moving 1×1 display


[ ][ ][ ][ ]:
Moves the image to direction
pressed.

The image can also be moved by


dragging the center of the image
(horizontal stripe portion).

OO Rotating 2×1 display


[ ]: Lowers the upper left
edge of the image
[ ]: Raises the upper left
edge of the image
[ ]: Lowers the upper right
edge of the image
[ ]: Raises the upper right
edge of the image

If you drag the left or right area of the image (horizontal


2×2 display
stripe portion) vertically, you can move the upper edge
up or down in the direction you are dragging it. If you
drag it horizontally, you can move the image horizon-
tally.

Linking 3 images
• When combining 3 images, the lower image will also
move/rotate if the central image is moved/rotated.



• 2x2 display can only be selected when combining 3


images.
• Set the plate overlap sequence during installation.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

196
6.14 CR stitching cassette exposure

1 Focus on exposure conditions to register


6.14.2 Exposure the CR stitching cassette.

The exposure method for CR stitching cassette is as


follows.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the stitching exposure images, make sure that the
combined parts are combined in the correct positions.
• If there is gap between the combined images, manu-
ally adjust the image position of the combined parts
using the viewer screen (for stitching combination
position adjustment). It is also recommended that you
arrange a measure in the combined image part during
exposure to confirm the combined parts easier. 2 Read the barcode of the CR stitching cas-
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • sette with a barcode reader.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The sequence by which the CR cassette is mounted
on the CR stitching cassette is as follows (The UPPER
label indicates the top).

If exposing with 3 REGIUS plates

(3)
(2)

(1)

• The barcode number read is displayed in the


exposure condition display area. This completes

Chapter 6
Upper
Middle the read preparation for REGIUS.
Lower
UPPER label

3 Perform exposure with the registered CR


• To expose by mounting 2 CR cassettes on stitching stitching cassette.
dedicated cassettes for 3 images, use the middle and • Configure the X-ray device settings and check
lower mounting positions only to mount the CR cas- the exposure information before making an ex-
sette (the UPPER label indicated the top). posure.
If exposing with 2 REGIUS plates
(2) Press the exposure switch of
the X-ray device
Do not use the upper level. (1)

4 Set the REGIUS plate on the read cassette


and read by REGIUS.
Upper
Middle
Lower
UPPER label

••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

197
6.14 CR stitching cassette exposure

6.14.3 Image combination

Images exposed by CR stitching cassette can be com-


bined automatically or manually. The procedure below
explains an example of combining 3 images.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When adjusting the image position of the combined
part manually, mark the characteristic structures (or a
scale) of the subject in the image. Use the marker as
a supplementary standard when performing manual
combinations.
• In stitching exposure, when plates overlap and are ar-
• The image read from the barcode on the CR
ranged so that there is no image loss in each plate's
stitching cassette will be displayed. boundaries, there might be a slight gap in the marker
position because of a minute difference in magnifica-
tion. After taking this into account, confirm the combi-
nation position through the marker.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

1 Select the images to be combined.

• Select the images to be combined from the or-


der list and press [ ] or [ ].

• The selected images are displayed in the com-


bined image display area.
• If you pressed [ ], continuously select the
associated images (second and third).

198
6.14 CR stitching cassette exposure

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

• [ ] and [ ] can be pressed only when the set


key for stitching exposure has been selected.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

2 Press [Stitching].

• The combined image is displayed.


• The combined image is added to the order list.

4 Press [ ].

Chapter 6
• The combined image is output.

• The combination position confirmation screen is


displayed.

3 Press [OK].

• The initial screen is displayed.

• To adjust the combination position manually, HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••


press [Adjust] and display the viewer screen (for • If outputting the combined image in sections, set the
stitching combination position adjustment). For number of sections by "number of combination output
information concerning the method of manually sheets."
adjusting the combination position, see "6.14.1 •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Screen structure."
• Press [Cancel] to return to the previous screen.

199
6.14 CR stitching cassette exposure

2 Press [Return] when image adjustment is


6.14.4 Image adjustment completed.

The adjustment method for the combined image is as


follows.

1 Display the combined image and press


[Viewer].

• The exposure screen is displayed.

• The viewer screen is displayed.


• Perform various image adjustments. For details
on how to operate the viewer screen, refer to
"3.6 Viewer Screen".

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the stitching exposure images, you will have the
following limitations when adjusting the images.
– ROI adjustment is not possible.
– The exposure field automatic recognition function
cannot be performed (manual adjustment is pos-
sible).
– If the effective image area is changed, only the im-
age size will change.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

200
6.15 Mammogram exposure

This section describes the screen structure and proce-


dure for mammogram exposure. 6.15.2 Exposure

The procedure for mammogram exposure is as follows.


6.15.1 Screen structure The procedure is explained using barcode registration
as an example.
The screen structure for the adjustment of the position
of the right and left breast images in mammogram ex-
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
posure is as follows.
• Using EF processing for mammogram images (stan-
dard processing) may produce artifacts in the high
(1) contrast area due to strong edge effect, which is char-
acteristic of this processing. You should use hybrid
processing for mammogram images in order to avoid
such phenomena from appearing on the chest wall.
(2) (2)
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

(4) 1 Select or register the examination for


which mammogram exposure is to be con-
(3) (5)
ducted.

Number Name Functions


Image preview Mammogram images are
(1)
area previewed in this area.
Adjust the position of the im-
ages in the vertical direction.
Operate the right and left
Vertical position-

Chapter 6
(2) vertical positioning buttons
ing button
to adjust the position of the
right and left images, respec-
tively.
Replaces the right and left
Segment flip but- images with each other. The
(3) • In the case of list screen, select the examination.
ton images are replaced every
time you press the button. • In the case of patient registration screen, regis-
Cancels outputting image in ter the examination.
(4) Cancel button
AB format. • Press [Perform].
Outputs mammogram images
(5) OK button
in AB format.

• The body part selection screen is displayed.


• If linked with host system such as RIS
→ Go to step 4

201
6.15 Mammogram exposure

2 Select the Exam. Tag for mammogram ex-


posure on the body part selection screen.

• The exposure screen is displayed.

4 Focus on the exposure condition to regis-


ter the Mammography cassette.

• The exposure body part is registered.

5 Read the barcode of the Mammography


3 Press [Perform]. cassette with a barcode reader.
• The barcode number read is displayed in the
exposure condition display area. This completes
the read preparation for REGIUS.

202
6.15 Mammogram exposure

6 Select image resolution (High) on the [Ac- HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••


quisition] tab. • Overlay settings (LR, CC, MLO, etc.) are made on the
[Overlay] tab (host or printer). For information on the
overlay setting method, see "6.5.17 Overlay."
• If the image needs revision (chest wall blackening
process, etc.) when checking the image by pressing
[preview] of overlay, adjust the image on the viewer
screen.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

9 Perform the second exposure or more.


• Repeat from step 4 to perform the second expo-
sure or more.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• In the case of mammogram exposure, [Standard] is 10 Press [ ] for the first image.
87.5 μm and [High] is 43.75 μm.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

7 Exposes using the registered Mammog-


raphy cassette.
• Make sure the exposure conditions are focused.
• Set up the X-ray device before exposure. Per-
form exposure after checking the exposure con-
ditions.

Press the exposure switch of


the X-ray device

Chapter 6
8 Read Mammography cassette with REGIUS.

• The image read from the barcode on the Mam-


mography cassette will be displayed.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• In the case of X-ray link, make sure exposure condi-
tions are displayed for the image after exposure.
• Confirm that additional information such as markers
and stamps is not superimposed on the breast area.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

203
6.15 Mammogram exposure

11 Press [ ] for the second image. 13 Press [ ].

• Images are output.

• The breast position adjustment screen is dis-


played. Two images are displayed on the right
and left, and the vertical position of them is au- • The initial screen is displayed.
tomatically adjusted.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When the two images are transposed with each other,
press [Swap] to replace them with each other.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

12 Fine-tune the position of the right and left


images if necessary.

204
6.15 Mammogram exposure

6.15.3 Chest wall blackening 3 Press [Chest wall].

process adjustment
Chest wall blackening process for the mammogram
image is conducted on the viewer screen.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Chest wall blackening process is [ON] under ordinary
circumstances.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

• Pressing [Chest wall] toggles blackening pro-


1 Focus on the image to be adjusted and
cess between [ON] and [OFF].
press [Viewer].

4 Click [Return].

Chapter 6
• The viewer screen is displayed.
• Return to the exposure screen.
• When outputting, make sure chest wall blacken-
2 Select the [Masking] tab. ing process is applied.

205
6.16 Media output

When outputting examination results to media, use the


media output function. 6.16.1 Screen structure

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Structure of the media output screen is as follows.


• When outputting to CD-R and DVD-R media, this de-
(1)
vice must be equipped with a writable media drive.
• Since writing to CD-R and DVD-R media uses the (2)
disc-at-once method, additional data cannot be added
on the media once data is written. (3)
• The patient ID is used in the image file name when
outputting to JPEG. When the patient ID file name has
restricted characters (.\/:*?"<>|), they are replaced with
"_". Be careful not to misidentify patients. (4)
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
(5)

Number Name Functions


Transition with the list
screen.
When you switch from the
(1) Sorting tab system monitor screen to the
media output screen, tabs
other than the [Media] tab
are not displayed.
Keyword input column for
(2) Filter items refined display for the patient
displayed in the [Media] tab.
Examinations registered on
(3) List display area the [Media] tab are dis-
played.
The setting when output-
ting to media is displayed. If
Conditions setting
(4) you press [Set], the setting
area
screen for media output is
displayed.
[Run] and [Close] are dis-
played. [Close] is only
displayed when the display
transitioned from the system
(5) Tool bar area monitor screen to the media
output screen. Press [Run] to
start writing. Press [Close] to
return to the system monitor
screen.

206
6.16 Media output

6.16.2 Output to media

Perform outputting to media using the following proce-


dure. First, show the media output screen from the list
screen or the system monitor screen.

OO When displaying the media output screen


from the list screen
• Press the [Media] tab.
• The media output screen is displayed.
→ Go to step 1

1 Press the examination that will be output


to media to select.

Chapter 6
• The media output screen is displayed.
→ Go to step 1

OO When displaying the media output screen


from the system monitor screen
• Press [Media] on the system monitor screen.
• The examination you pressed will have a se-
lected status. When outputting multiple exami-
nations, press the other examinations in succes-
sion to select them.
• Pressing the examination with a selected status
cancels the selection.
• When selecting all examinations, press [Select
All].
• When canceling all selected statuses, press
[Unselect All].
• When selecting a range, select the start and end
points after pressing [Area Select].

207
6.16 Media output

2 Press [Set].

• The drive information of the output destination is


displayed in [Media:]. The capacity of the output
destination is displayed in [Capacity:].

4 Select the image format. Press [JPEG] or


[PDI].

• The setting screen is displayed.

3 Select the output destination. Press [HDD]


or [DVD/CD].

• When [JPEG] is pressed, select image size and


image quality. Select one image size from [25%],
[50%], [75%], or [100%]. Select one image qual-
ity from [Low], [Standard], or [High].

208
6.16 Media output

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••


• When image size becomes larger and image quality • The set contents are preserved even after this device
becomes higher, data volume during output becomes is restarted.
larger. •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The JPEG image size is the aspect ratio for the origi-
nal image. For example, when the image is at 1,500 x 6 Press [Run].
1,000 pixels, it has the following image sizes:
– 100%, 1,500 x 1,000 pixels
– 75%, 1,125 x 750 pixels
– 50%, 750 x 500 pixels
– 25%, 375 x 250 pixels
• The JPEG image quality is the image quality (com-
pression ratio) when the JPEG image is created. The
relationship between the image quality and the com-
pression ratio is as follows:
– High: image quality 100 (uncompressed)
– Standard: image quality 75
– Low: image quality 50
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

5 Press [OK].

Chapter 6
• When outputting to JPEG, specify the output
destination folder for the image. Specify the
• Pressing [Cancel] returns to the previous
folder name, then press [OK].
screen. This time, the set contents are not re-
• You can enter up to 15 characters.
flected.
• Press [Cancel] to stop media output.

• Output settings are reflected, and when return-


• The screen that shows the progress status is
ing to the original screen, the contents are dis-
displayed and creation of the write data starts.
played in the conditions setting area.
• Press [Cancel] to stop media output.

209
6.16 Media output

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• Exposed images of completed examinations that in-
clude 1 or more sheets of exposed images become
targets for media output.
• Discarded images cannot be output.
• The following examinations cannot be output to media
even if exposed images are included.
– Paused examination.
– Examination with a history of deleted images.
– Examination of discarded images only.
• When an image is output to media in PDI format, out-
• The screen that shows the progress status is
put it together with a PDI viewer. Depending on the
displayed and writing to media starts.
settings at installation, it may also be possible to en-
able automatic launching of the PDI viewer.
• Do not specify the drive in which the software for this
device is installed as the output destination drive.
• In the examination that was output to media (examina-
tion that has one or more images that was normally
output), an icon is displayed in the [Output finished]
field of the list display area.
• When you press [Area Select] to select the range, the
button display changes to [Area Selecting]. If range is
selected or cancelled, the button display will return to
[Area Select].
• Pressing [Area Select] to select the start point of the
selected range displays that examination in a color
that indicates a temporary selection. Selecting the end
• When writing to media is finished, the display point of the selected range displays all examinations
returns to the original screen. of the selected range in the normal color.
• When the media output screen is displayed from • When start point is selected in the selected range, per-
the list screen forming the following operations cancels the selected
→ Press a tab other than the [Media] tab to re- status of the range.
turn to the list screen. – [Select All] is pressed.
• When the media output screen is displayed from – [Unselect All] is pressed.
the system monitor screen – [Area Selecting] is pressed.
→ Press [Close] to return to the system monitor – Refined search is on.
screen. – [Clear] is pressed.
– The display is transitioned to another screen from
the media output screen.
• The file name of the image to be output to media is
automatically added in the following format (folder
structure):
– Folder name (specified)
└Folder (PatientID)
└Folder (ExposureDate)
└File (PatientID_Name_Exam.Tag_
ExposureTime(seconds)_ImageNumber.jpg)
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

210
6.16 Media output

– Check [Use AutoPlay for all media and devices] on


6.16.3 Operation of the PDI the [Hardware and Sound/Auto play] screen, then
viewer select [Install or run program from your media] on
the [Software and games] screen on the control
This section describes how to start and operate the panel of Windows
PDI viewer.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The device to start the PDI viewer must meet the fol-
lowing specifications.
OS: Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista, or
Windows 7
CPU: Pentium III processor or higher
Memory: 256 MB RAM or more
Graphic: 32 bit graphic board or higher
Resolution: 1024 × 768 pixels or finer •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
CD-ROM drive: (24 ×) or faster
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
2 Press [PDI Viewer].
Start-up of the PDI viewer

1 Set the disc on the disc drive of this de-


vice.
• The [INDEX.HTM] screen is displayed.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• If it does not start automatically, double-click the [IN-
DEX.HTM] file icon in the disc drive window.
• If you start up the PDI viewer from the CD on Windows

Chapter 6
7, the dialog screen of [AutoPlay] will be displayed.
Press [Run PDIView.exe] to start up the PDI viewer.

• A security warning message is displayed.

• Either of the following settings is required for the auto-


matic start of the PDI viewer.
– Check [Always do this for software and games:],
then press [Run PDIView.exe] on the dialog screen
of [Auto play].

211
6.16 Media output

3 Press [Run]. Number Name Functions


Switch mode Changes the mode to the stack
(8)
(Stack) display mode.
Change number Changes the number of frames
(9)
of frames of the image.
Displays the DICOM tag infor-
(10) Tag information
mation.
Gradation pro- Apply gradation processing to
(11)
cess the image.
(12) Zoom Zooms in/out on the image.
(13) Pan Move the image.
Enlarges the area pointed with
(14) Magnifier
the mouse pointer.
Reverses black and white on
(15) Contrast invert
the image.
Displays or hides the overlay.
(16) Overlay
*Not used in CS-7.
Reverses the image in the
• The PDI viewer is displayed. (17) Horizontal flip
horizontal direction.
Reverses the image in the
(18) Vertical flip
vertical direction.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
(19) Right turn Turns the image to the right.
• The following message may be displayed when you
press [Run]. Then press [Run]. (20) Left turn Turns the image to the left.
(21) Straight line Draws a straight line.
(22) Text Press this to input text.

••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • (23) Distance Measures the distance.


(24) Angle Measures the angle.

Operation of the PDI viewer Measures the area of a rect-


(25) Rectangle area
angle.
The following buttons are displayed on the PDI viewer. Measures the area of an el-
(26) Ellipse area
lipse.
(1) to (27) in order from left
Measures the area of a poly-
to right (27) Polygon area
gon.
(28) (27)
(28) Image change tab Changes the image.
(26)
Image display
(25) (29) Displays the image.
area
(30) [×] Closes the PDI viewer.

(29)

Number Name Functions


(1) Patient list Displays the patient list dialog.
Reads the data stored in the
(2) Import file
drive.
Switches the screen to that of
(3) Go to next patient
the next patent.
Switches the screen to that of
(4) Go to prev patient
the previous patent.
Goes to the previous DICOM
(5) Go to prev series
series screen.
Goes to the next DICOM series
(6) Go to next series
screen.
Switch mode Changes the mode to the tile
(7)
(Tile) display mode.

212
6.17 Multi-study

This section describes the screen structure of the ex- HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
posure screen and procedure of examination when
• Functions of buttons not described here are the same
performing examination with the multi-study.
as those of the normal list screen.
• Patient information cannot be sorted by number of
examinations, number of exposures, or number of ap-
6.17.1 Screen structure pointments.
• When multiple examinations are selected, nothing is
Structure of the screen when performing examination displayed in the examination information display area.
with the multi-study is as follows. • If used by multi-study, [Modify] inside the toolbar can-
not be pressed.
List screen • [Guard] inside the toolbar can be clicked even if mul-
tiple examinations are selected.
(1)
• If using multi-study, examination cannot be started
even if patient information or examination information
(2) is double-clicked. To start examination, press [Per-
form].
(3) • If using multi-study, operation with barcode reader is
(4)
not supported.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Number Name Functions


Patient information to serve
as parent information in tree
display format. Each press of
this button toggles between
Patient informa-

Chapter 6
(1) selection and no selection.
tion
Selecting patient information
also enables all examination
information to serve as child
information to be selected.
Patient information to serve
as child information in tree
Examination
(2) display format. Each press of
information
this button toggles between
selection and no selection.
Displayed on the left of pa-
tient information. When [+] is
pressed, examination infor-
(3) [+] and [-] buttons mation of the patient is dis-
played. When [-] is pressed,
examination information of
the patient is hidden.
This is displayed when
performing exposure in multi-
study only. This switches the
list screen display format.
Study View/
Pressing [Study View] dis-
(4) Patient View
plays the normal list screen
switch buttons
(not tree format).
Pressing [Patient View]
displays the multi-study list
screen (tree format).

213
6.17 Multi-study

Exposure screen
6.17.2 Multi-study examination from
patient registration screen
(1)
When conducting examination by multi-study from the
(2)
patient registration screen, use the following proce-
dure.

1 Input the patient ID or accession number


in the patient registration screen.

Body part selection screen

(2) 2 Press [Search].


(1)
(3)
(4)
(5)

Number Name Functions


Examination to exposure can
be switched by pressing
[ ] or [ ]. Total
Examination
(1) number of examinations and
switching button
order of currently displayed
examinations is displayed in
the display section.
Accession number of the
(2) Accession No. displayed examination is
displayed.
(3) Delete button Deletes the examination.
(4) Add button Adds the examination.
Deletes exposures individu-
Shot deletion but-
(5) ally after selecting the expo-
ton
sure to be deleted.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The screen structure other than (1) to (5) is same as
each normal screen. However, [ ] cannot be pressed
on the exposure screen when performing an examina-
tion with multi-study.
• List of examinations corresponding to the input
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
patient ID or accession number is displayed.

214
6.17 Multi-study

3 Select an examination to perform exposure. 5 Perform exposure.


• Expose the first examination.
• Exposure and other functions can be operated
same as normal examination. For detail, refer to
"5.5 Exposure with AeroDR Detector" and later.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Examination will be performed in the order of selection.
• Selection will be cleared when selected examination is
pressed. • It will transition automatically to next examina-
• All the examination displayed will be selected when tion once the last exposure for that examination
[Select All] is pressed, and examination will be per- is completed.
formed in the order in the list.
• [Select All] will change to [Unselect All] when all the
examinations are selected.
• Selection will be cleared when [Unselect All] is
pressed when the examination is selected.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

4 Press [OK].

Chapter 6
• The second examination is displayed.
• Perform the subsequent examinations with
same procedure.

• Press [Cancel] to return to the previous screen. 6 Once all the examinations are finished,
press [ ] to end the examination.

• The exposure screen is displayed.


• Total number and order of the selected exami-
nation, and the examination accession number
for the first examination are displayed.

215
6.17 Multi-study

6.17.3 Multi-study examination


from list screen
Examination method with multi-study from the list
screen is as follows.

1 Press [Refresh] on the list screen.

• The initial screen is displayed.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Exposures can be added or deleted even after switch-
ing to the body part selection screen.
• In case of the automatic 1×1 display screen, next
examination can be displayed by pressing [NEXT]
displayed in the exposure conditions display area after
completing the exposure of 1 examination.
• The information is imported from the higher sys-
tem and the list is refreshed.

2 Select the patient or the examination.

••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

• Select the examination, confirming the examina-


tion information by pressing [+] as necessary.

• The selected patient (examination) is displayed


highlighted.

216
6.17 Multi-study

3 Press [Perform].

• The second examination is displayed.


• Perform the subsequent examinations with
same procedure.

5 Once all the examinations are finished,


press [ ] to end the examination.

• The exposure screen is displayed.


• Total number and order of the selected exami-
nation, and the examination accession number

Chapter 6
for the first examination are displayed.

4 Perform exposure.
• Expose the first examination.
• Exposure and other functions can be operated
same as normal examination. For detail, refer to
"5.5 Exposure with AeroDR Detector" and later.

• The initial screen is displayed.

• It will transition automatically to next examina-


tion once the last exposure for that examination
is completed.

217
6.17 Multi-study

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Exposures can be added or deleted even after moved
to the body part selection screen.
• In case of the automatic 1×1 display screen, next
examination can be displayed by pressing [NEXT]
displayed in the exposure conditions display area after
completing the exposure of 1 examination.

••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

218
6.18 Examination sharing

Multiple these devices can share examination informa- Number Name Functions
tion, and perform exposure, check/adjustment of im- Displayed when receiving
Examination start
ages. Examination information can be sent or received preparation examination information from
from the device to another device. (6) another this device. This
confirmation screen disappears when re-
screen ception is complete.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Press this button to prevent


automatic start of examina-
tion after examination infor-
• Examination sharing and multi-study cannot be used (7) Cancel button
mation is received. It does
at the same time. not cancel the reception pro-
cess itself.
• Examination can be shared among up to nine units of
this device for one system. References an examination.
This button is available only
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • (8) Refer button
when a completed examina-
tion is selected.
(9) Refresh button Updates the examination list.
Starts an examination re-
ceived from another this
6.18.1 Screen structure (10) Perform button device. This button is not
available when a completed
examination is selected.

List screen (reception)


HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Displays examination information of another this de- • Functions of tabs and buttons not described here are
vice. the same as those of the normal list screen.
• In the [Study Sharing] tab, [Delete], [Modify], [Append],
(1) and [Guard] cannot be pressed.
(2) • On the [Examination sharing] tab, the contents of
(3) the list are not updated by clearing the entries of
[Specified terminal] and [Filter condition] by pressing
the [Clear] button. The contents of the list are updated
(6) by executing search by pressing the [Search] button.

Chapter 6
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
(7)
(8)
(9)
(4) (10)
(5)
Number Name Functions
Displays examinations of
another this device. Informa-
tion is updated automatically
(1) Share tab
at certain intervals. In addi-
tion, this tab does not show
examination details.
Select another this device
(2) Specified terminal whose shared examinations
are to be displayed.
Specify conditions to display
filtered examination list. Fil-
(3) Filter conditions tering can be performed with
"Pending Reason", "[Status]",
etc.
Receives the selected ex-
amination. This button is dis-
(4) Receive button
played only when operating
in examination sharing.
Cancels the reception 
process of the selected ex-
(5) Cancel button amination. This button is dis-
played only when operating
in examination sharing.

219
6.18 Examination sharing

List screen (transmission) Exposure screen (transmission)


Displays the examination information of this device. When an examination is paused during exposure, the
screen below is displayed.
(1)

(2)
(1)
(2)
(5) (3)

(6)
(3)
(4) (4)

Number Name Functions Number Name Functions


This tab displays the exami- This is displayed when [ ]
(1) OrderList tab nation information registered is pressed depending on the
in this device. setting. This button is dis-
Specify conditions to display fil- played only when operating in
Details confirma-
tered examination list. Filtering (1) examination sharing.
(2) Filter conditions tion screen
can be performed with "Pend- Pressing [OK] pauses the ex-
ing Reason", "Study Date", etc. amination and transitions to the
initial screen. Pressing [Cancel]
Transmits a selected examination
cancels the examination pause.
to another this device. This button
(3) Send button Select the pending reason
is displayed only when operating (2) Reason
in examination sharing. for the examination.
Cancels the transmission Select another this device as
process of the selected ex- the transmission destination.
(3) Destination
(4) Cancel button amination. This button is dis- Selecting [None] does not per-
played only when operating form automatic transmission.
in examination sharing. Depending on the settings,
This is displayed when [Send] is two of the following buttons
pressed. Select another this device will appear.
as the transmission destination. [ ]: Pauses examination
Transmission for which focus has
Pressing [OK] on this confirma- Examination
destination been achieved.
(5) tion screen transmits examination (4) pause/finish but-
confirmation [ ]: Finishes examination
information to the selected other ton area
screen and returns to the list
this device. Pressing [Cancel] can-
cels the transmission process and screen.
closes the confirmation screen. [ ]: Finishes exposure
and returns to the list
(6) Refresh button Updates the examination list.
screen.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••


• Functions of tabs and buttons not described here are
• The functions of [ ] and [ ] are as follows.
the same as those of the normal list screen.
• An error message is displayed if the buttons below are Button name Examination RIS/HOST Examina-
pressed while an examination reserved for transmis- status tion sharing
sion or transmitted examination is selected. [ ] Exposure finished Transmit No
– [Delete]
Pause at sharing
– [Modify] [ ] Does not transmit Yes
destination
– [Refer]
– [Append] • The [ ] function is set to one of the following de-
– [Guard] pending on the settings at installation.
– [Perform] Button name Examination RIS/HOST Examina-
• The name of the [OrderList] tab is set at installation. status tion sharing
• A tab to automatically filter by specifying a pending Pause at sharing
reason can be added. Whether to display this tab, [ ] Does not transmit Yes
destination
name of the tab, and pending reason to be displayed [ ] Pause Does not transmit No
are set at installation.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

220
6.18 Examination sharing

6.18.2 Reception of examina- 3 Select an examination to receive.

tion information
Receive shared examination information following the
procedure below.

1 Press the [Study Sharing] tab on the list screen.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Only one examination can be received per reception
operation. Multiple examinations cannot be received
at the same time.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

2 Select this device whose shared exami-


nation information is to be acquired and 4 Press [Receive].
press [Search].
• If this device is already selected, update the list
by pressing [Refresh].

Chapter 6
• The examination is received.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When examination information is received, the exami-
nation information is deleted from the transfer source
this device.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• Reception of shared examination information is


started and displayed in the list.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• To update examination information to be displayed,
press [Refresh].
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

221
6.18 Examination sharing

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
6.18.3 Transmission of exami-
• If the examination to be received is reserved for re- nation information
ception or transmission with another this device, then
an error message is displayed and reception is not The procedure for transmitting examination infor-
reserved. mation is as follows.
• If the examination to be received is waiting for image
retransfer, or image reading has not been completed
after job registration, an error message is displayed 1 Select an examination to send.
and reception is not reserved.
• Pressing [Perform] displays the exposure screen as
soon as the examination is received.

2 Press [Send].

••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

• The transmission destination confirmation


screen is displayed.

222
6.18 Examination sharing

3 Select the transmission destination this


6.18.4 Transmission of exami-
device.
nation information dur-
ing exposure
The procedure for transmitting examination information
by pausing an examination during exposure is as fol-
lows.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The examination information cannot be transmitted
if the examination to be paused includes image re-
transmission standby or examination whose barcode
has already been read.
4 Press [OK]. •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

1 Press [ ].

• Pressing [Cancel] returns the screen to the pre-


vious screen.

Chapter 6
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The list screen is not updated after examination infor-
mation is transmitted. Press [Refresh] to display the
latest information.
• When examination information is transmitted, the ex-
amination information is deleted from this device.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• If the examination to be transmitted is reserved for re-
ception from another this device, or reserved for trans-
mission to another this device, then an error message
is displayed and transmission is not reserved.
• If the examination to be transmitted is waiting for im-
• A confirmation screen is displayed.
age retransfer, or image reading has not been com-
pleted after job registration, an error message is dis-
played and transmission is not reserved.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

223
6.18 Examination sharing

2 Press [OK]. 4 Press [OK].

• Press [Cancel] to return to the previous screen. • Press [Cancel] to return to the previous screen.

• The details confirmation screen is displayed. • Transmission to the specified other devices is
reserved, and the initial screen is displayed.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The details confirmation screen may not be displayed
depending on the setting. In this case, pressing [OK]
transmits the data with the preset pending reason to
the preset destination.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

3 Select the pending reason and the trans-


mission destination.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Select [None] for transmission destination if you do
not want to transmit the examination.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

224
6.19 Statistics • summary tool

With the statistics • summary tool, various information


items such as exposure status of this device or this 6.19.2 Acquisition of various
device within the network or operation status of the information
AeroDR Detector can be referenced or output into a
file. Acquire various information following the procedure
below.

6.19.1 Screen structure 1 Display the user tool screen, and start the
statistics • summary tool.
The basic screen structure of the statistics • summary
tool is as follows. The type of information to be dis-
played will vary according to the tool.

(1)
(2) (4)

(3) (5)

• For how to display the user tool screen and how


to start the statistics • summary tool, refer to
(6) "User Tool Operation Manual".

Number Name Functions


Information type Select the type of information
(1)
selection button to be referenced.

Chapter 6
Select the period when
Period specifica- information is collected or the
tion, operator operator name, etc.
(2)
name, modality, The options (filter conditions) will
reader selection change according to the type of
information to be referenced.
Displays information in a list
format. Pressing the item
Information dis-
(3) name of displayed informa-
play area
tion sorts the item name in
ascending/descending order.
(4) List Update button Refreshes the displayed list.
• The statistics • summary tool starts.
Outputs the displayed list in
Export CSV CSV format. When the list
(5)
button has been sorted, outputs in
the sorted state.
2 Press the type selection button for in-
formation to be acquired to specify the
(6) OK button Exit the statistics • summary tool.
search range, etc.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• A started this device within the network is the target of
statistics and summary. A this device connected to the
network but not started is not the target of statistics
and summary.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The items to be displayed in the information display
area and order of the items are set at installation.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

225
6.19 Statistics • summary tool

3 Press [List Update].


6.19.3 Options of information
(filter conditions)
The options (filter conditions) displayed on each infor-
mation screen are as follows.

Options.
Information Remarks
(filter conditions)
Re- Displays the operator who
Period, opera-
Exposure performed retake or modal-
tor, modality
Info ity.
Exposure Period, opera- Displays exposure informa-
Info tor, modality tion.
• Selected information is acquired.
Displays information of
Console Period, another device within the
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • Info modality network. Only started de-
vices are display targets.
• Pressing [Export CSV] enables you to output
Displays the usage of the
information in CSV format. Plate
Modality AeroDR Detector or CR
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Info
cassette.
Period, reader, Displays the reader infor-
Reader Info
modality mation.
4 Press [OK].

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• Pressing the operator name while displaying "Re-
Exposure Info" displays the breakdown of discarded
images of the operator.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• Return to the user tool screen.

226
6.20 Other functions

6.20.1 Switching of the wireless


communication function
of the AeroDR Detector
The wireless communication functions of the AeroDR
Detector (prohibited/permitted) can be switched.

1 Press [System] on the initial screen.

• The exposure room screen is displayed.

3 Press [Wireless Prohibition] to switch the


wireless communication function.

• [ ] shows that wireless communica-

Chapter 6
tion function is on.
• [ ] shows that wireless communica-
tion function is off.

• The system monitor screen is displayed.

2 Select the [Exposure Room] tab.

• A confirmation screen is displayed.

227
6.20 Other functions

4 Press [OK].
6.20.2 Release of the X-ray
linkage when using
AeroDR S-SRM KIT
When using AeroDR S-SRM KIT with sync mode to
the X-ray device set to manual connection, you can
release the link to the X-ray.

Screen configuration

• Press [Cancel] to return to the previous screen.

(1)

Number Name Functions


The link to the X-ray device
(1) Free button is canceled to enable expo-
sure.

• The wireless communication function switches. HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••


• If [Free] does not appear, press [ ] on the toolbar.
5 Press [Close]. • When a fault occurs due to a bad connection etc.,
[Free] turns yellow. Check the connection status and
power status of the AeroDR S-SRM KIT and then ex-
ecute the link setting again.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Canceling link to X-ray device


The link to the X-ray device can be canceled as fol-
lows.

1 Press [Free].

• Returns to the initial screen.

228
6.20 Other functions

6.20.3 Screen saver

When operation is not performed for a certain time, the


screen saver starts.

Login as another operator after screen saver is canceled


If displaying the login screen after canceling screen
saver, it is possible to log in with another user ID.
The following procedure describes the case where the
• A confirmation screen is displayed.
screen saver starts up while logged in as Edward.N,
and logging in as Alan.E after canceling screen saver.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The link to the X-ray device is released to enable
1 After canceling screen saver, input the
exposure only while the confirmation screen is
user ID and password of Alan.E, then
displayed.
press [Login].
• Press [Use XG-Sync] to restore the link to the X-ray
device.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

About messages during CR exposure


Depending on the settings at installation, messages
may appear during CR exposure.

Chapter 6
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The link to the X-ray device is released only while the
confirmation screen is displayed.
• Press [OK] to restore the link to the X-ray device.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

• A confirmation screen is displayed.

229
6.20 Other functions

2 Press [OK].
6.20.4 Bar code reader and
magnetic card reader
When optional bar code reader and magnetic card
reader are used, various types of information can be
read and input.
The following are precautionary items when bar code
reader and magnetic card reader are used.

OO Bar code reader


• When placed on its special stand, the laser is al-
ways in the lit state.
• Press [Cancel] to return to the previous screen. • When used in the constant lit state freeing the
hands, exercise full caution that the laser is not
discharged in a direction where it will enter the
eyes of people.
• The bar code can be read in either up or down
orientation of the CR cassette.
• After pressing the trigger button, if the bar code
is not read in a certain time, the laser goes out.
When reading again, release the trigger button,
press it again, and discharge the laser.

OO Bluetooth bar code reader


• The battery lasts for about 2 days when connect-
ed to a PC via Bluetooth communication.
* Varies depending on the usage.
• When not used, connect the USB cable to
• The initial screen for user ID of Alan.E is dis-
charge.
played.
• For approximate charging time and battery re-
placement, refer to the Bluetooth bar code reader
operation manual.
• The display shifts to sleep state when there are
no operations, and screen display disappears,
however Bluetooth communication is not discon-
nected.
• Communication distance is within 10 m.
* Varies depending on the usage.
• When Bluetooth communication is interrupted,
recover communication with the [▲] button of the
bar code.
* When communication is disconnected, it
"beeps" and "HID Disconnected" is displayed
on the screen.
• Data read with the bar code reader while Blue-
tooth communication is disconnected will not be
sent to this device.
* Accumulated data is not transferred when con-
nection is recovered.
• If bar codes are not transmitted, ID search and
screen transitions are not performed. If not
moved to the exposure screen, recover com-
munication by pressing the [▲] button of the bar
code reader. When communication is recovered,
"Connecting...." is displayed on the screen.

230
6.20 Other functions

• When reading bar codes of the patient list, read


while keeping the distance from the bar codes to 6.20.5 Addition of high preci-
approx. 5 to 10 cm. Sometimes it is not possible sion monitor
to read outside this range.
* Reading distance will vary depending on the An optional high precision monitor can be connected
size of bar code and code system. to this device.
• Connect one PC to one Bluetooth bar code read- The following are precautionary items when a high
er in tandem. Do not connect multiple units. precision monitor is used.
• During normal operation, if the PC is shut down, • The image that has focus on the exposure screen
connection of Bluetooth communication is discon- or the image displayed on the viewer screen is
nected, and the power of the bar code reader is displayed. Unexposed images on the list screen,
turned off 5 minutes later. the body part selection screen, and the exposure
• The valid digit number cannot be set, depending screen are not displayed.
on the barcode reader used.

OO Magnetic card reader


• When a card is read while the screen saver is op-
erating, some data may be lost. Perform reading
after the screen saver is released.
• After reading magnetic data, always check that
the patient information displayed on the screen
matches the patient information written on the
magnetic card.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Insert the magnetic card from the edge of the
magnetic card reader unit, and slide horizontally • Images cannot be manipulated on the high precision
to the opposite edge. monitor. Perform manipulation of images with this device.
• While the magnetic data is being read, do not • Since high precision monitors has a different aspect
perform input. Sometimes magnetic data gets ratio from that of the exposure screen and viewer
mixed with data input by input operation. screen, when you enlarge, reduce, or move an image
• When reading data from magnetic cards, focus on the exposure screen or viewer screen, an image of
is automatically set on an accession number or a different area may be displayed on such a monitor.

Chapter 6
patient ID that matches the data. Initial display

Normal monitor (Display High precision monitor


magnification: 1) (Display magnification: 1)

Enlarged image
Enlarge to 1.3 times

Normal monitor (Display High precision monitor


magnification: 1.3) (Display magnification: 1.3)
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

231
6.20 Other functions

6.20.7 Addition of monitor for


6.20.6 Addition of sub monitor
checking image
An optional sub monitor can be connected to this de- An optional monitor for checking image can be con-
vice. nected to this device.
The following are precautionary items when a sub The following are precautionary items when a monitor
monitor is used. for checking image is used.
• Used as auxiliary exposure equipment in the ex- • Used as a monitor for checking images when op-
posure room. erating this device with the portable X-ray device.
• A network display adapter is needed for connec-
tion.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• This device's monitor will not be displayed when con-
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • nected.
• When a problem, such as network disconnection, • When connecting a monitor for checking images, do
occurs, there may not be anything displayed on the not perform exposure.
monitor. If this occurs, restart this device. • Do not perform a diagnosis using the image displayed
• If the power for the AeroDR Interface Unit is turned on/ in the monitor for checking images.
off while a sub monitor is connected, the network can •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
be disconnected and the screen display goes black or
freezes, being no-op. When turning on/off the power
for the AeroDR Interface Unit, do so after unplugging
the power cable for the network display adapter or re-
start this device after turning the power on/off.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

232
Chapter
7
Displayed Messages
This chapter describes the displayed messages
and the countermeasures.

233
7.1 Displayed message types and description order

7.1.1 Displayed message types

Messages for warnings and cautions will be displayed on the screen in dialog boxes or balloons. The following de-
scribes the difference between a dialog box and a balloon.

Dialog box Balloon

• [ ] is displayed together with the message. The


• Together with a message, [OK] and [Cancel] are screen can be closed by pressing [ ]. The screen
displayed. Read the message, and perform the ap- will also close after a certain amount of time elapses.
propriate operation.
• Pressing [Cancel] will basically return you to the pre-
vious screen.

7.1.2 Displayed message description order

The following classifications (order) describe displayed messages and the corresponding countermeasures. After
distinguishing which screens dialog boxes or balloons are displayed in, check the message details and the counter-
measures.

7.2.1 Messages displayed in dialog boxes and 7.2.2 Messages displayed in balloons and
countermeasures countermeasures

(1) Dialog boxes displayed in the login screen (1) Balloons displayed in the login screen

(2) Dialog boxes displayed in the patient registration screen (2) Balloons displayed in the patient registration screen

(3) Dialog boxes displayed in the list screen (3) Balloons displayed in the body part selection screen

(4) Dialog boxes displayed in the body part selection screen (4) Balloons displayed in the exposure screen

(5) Dialog boxes displayed in the exposure screen (5) Balloons displayed in the viewer screen

(6) Dialog boxes displayed in the viewer screen

(7) Dialog boxes displayed in the system monitor screen

(8) Dialog boxes displayed in the media output screen

234
7.2 Dialog boxes/balloons and countermeasures

7.2.1 Messages displayed in dialog boxes and countermeasures

Displayed messages and countermeasures are described according to the type of screen they are displayed in. If the
following messages appear, take the respective countermeasures.

1. Dialog boxes displayed in the login screen


Displayed message Problems/countermeasures
This is displayed when a log in with separate user account is
User: [USERNAME] has already logged in.
attempted while other user is logged in.
Log off this user?
Press [OK] to log in with separate user account.
Now reading image. This is displayed when a log in with separate user account is
Please login after a while. attempted while other user is logged in during the time when the
image is captured from the reader and being displayed.

2. Dialog boxes displayed in the patient registration screen


Displayed message Problems/countermeasures
PatientID is mandatory, Please enter PatientID.
Study ID is mandatory, Please enter PatientID.
This is displayed when the mandatory field is not entered.
PatientName is mandatory, Please enter PatientName.
Press [OK] to close the screen.
Sex is mandatory, Please enter Sex.
Birth date is mandatory, Please enter birth date.
Cannot read the magnetic card. This is displayed if an error occurred when a magnetic card is
Restart the system. read.
There is an exposed image in the study, do you want to edit the This is displayed when modifying the patient information of the
study? completed study.
Mandatory Field is not Entered. Perform Not Possible. This is displayed when an invalid character is entered.
Press [OK] to close the screen.
There is no corresponding study, patient info. This is displayed when searched patient or study cannot be found.
Press [OK] to close the screen.

Chapter 7
Study already present in DB. Do you want to use that study? This is displayed when an study information is already regis-
tered in this device when an study information is entered.
Patient info already present in DB. Do you want to use that This is displayed when an patient information is already regis-
patient info? tered in this device when an patient information is entered.
DB Error - Create order failed. This is displayed when new study cannot be created.
Error updating patient DB. This is displayed when updating of the patient information has
failed after modifying the patient information.
The corresponding patient is not present in the DB This is displayed when a patient information could not be found
in the patient information search.
Order is registered. Do you want to overwrite? This is displayed when [Clear] is pressed for the registered study.
Same Patient ID: [Patient ID],Patient Name: [Patient Name],Sex: This is displayed when registering a patient information that is
[Sex],DOB: available in Database, do you want to overwrite? already registered in this device.
Do you want to clear all? This is displayed when [Clear] is pressed after entering the patient
information. Press [OK] to clear the contents of the input form.
Changing patient information may cause errors in PACS study This is displayed when the patient information is modified after
matching. Confirm all changed data immediately on PACS. starting the study.
Search Error occurred This is displayed when a search to the higher system has failed.
Please enter the mandatory fields This is displayed when an study is attempted to start without
values entered into the mandatory input form.

Continued on the next page

235
7.2 Dialog boxes/balloons and countermeasures

Displayed message Problems/countermeasures


Do you want to register the study? This is displayed when trying to transit to the list screen after
entering the patient information.
There is no corresponding study, patient. This is displayed when corresponding study or patient informa-
tion was not found as a result of searching the higher system for
study or patient information.
Registration Failed This is displayed when registering of patient information has failed.
Do you want to overwrite the data? This is displayed when a patient information is read from the
magnetic card while operating in the patient registration screen.
Please input the content for searching. This is displayed when [Search] is pressed without the values
required for search are not entered in the input form.
Please Enter Value for both Content Date and Content Time This is displayed when both image date and time are not entered
Fields in the image supplementary information and [OK] is pressed.
Cannot capture images due to low battery power. This is displayed when the battery level of the AeroDR Detector
Charge the battery. is getting low. Charge the AeroDR Detector.
Is it OK to log off? This is displayed when [Logoff] on the toolbar area is pressed.
Press [OK] to log off.
AE Title is changed and output Queue is present. Do you want This is displayed when the area selection button is pressed
to continue? while there is untransmitted data.
Error occurred in changing Area. Please try again. This is displayed when it was not possible to switch to the corre-
sponding IP address.

3. Dialog boxes displayed in the list screen


Displayed message Problems/countermeasures
This is displayed when [Delete] on the list screen is pressed.
Do you want to delete the selected record?
Press [OK] to delete the study.
Multiple {X} Study Exist With Given Information. This is displayed when there are multiple studies with same
patient ID or Accession Number as a result of study search.
Study is in progress state, Do you want to perform? This is displayed when a study with the state of "in progress" is
attempted to start.
Study is Already Performed in Another Console. This is displayed when a study performed in other exposure
room is attempted to start.
Error updating patient DB. This is displayed when the update of the database has failed.
Invalid value, Perform not possible. This is displayed when an invalid value is entered.
Input is Mandatory. This is displayed when a study is attempted to start without
values entered in mandatory fields.
Perform Not Possible. This is displayed when a start of selected study has failed.
DB data got updated, Updated Study will be displayed. This is displayed when a selected study has been updated by a
higher system.
Study got deleted from database, Perform operation is not pos- This is displayed when a selected study has been deleted by a
sible. higher system.
Study will be returned to suspended state. Is it OK? This is displayed when [Append] is pressed.
Press [OK] to put study on hold.
Cannot capture images due to low battery power. This is displayed when the battery level of the AeroDR Detector
Charge the battery. is getting low. Charge the AeroDR Detector.
Is it OK to log off? This is displayed when [Logoff] on the toolbar area is pressed.
Press [OK] to log off.
Cannot perform the study as the study is in moving. This is displayed when [Perform] is pressed during transmis-
sion of the examination or reception of the examination by the
transmission destination. Cancel sending the examination, or
start the examination using the transmission destination CS-7.
Send Error occured. Please refresh the study list and try again. This is displayed if the applicable examination does not exist, or
transmission to another CS-7 has already been reserved when
attempting to send the examination.
Check that the applicable examination has not moved to another CS-7.
Send Cancel Error occured. Please refresh the study list and try This is displayed when attempting to cancel sending the exami-
again. nation, and the applicable examination does not exist.
Check that the applicable examination has not moved to another CS-7.

236
7.2 Dialog boxes/balloons and countermeasures

Displayed message Problems/countermeasures


Receive Error occured. Please refresh the study list and try This is displayed when attempting to receive the examination,
again. and the applicable examination does not exist.
Check that the applicable examination has not moved to another CS-7.
Receive Cancel Error occured. Please refresh the study list and This is displayed when attempting to cancel receiving the ex-
try again. amination, and the applicable examination does not exist.
Check that the applicable examination has not moved to another CS-7.
Study Delete Error occured. Please refresh the study list and try This is displayed when attempting to delete the examination,
again. and the applicable examination does not exist.
Check that the applicable examination has not moved to another CS-7.
Study Guard Error occured. Please refresh the study list and try This is displayed when attempting to guard the examination,
again. and the applicable examination does not exist.
Check that the applicable examination has not moved to another CS-7.
Study Append Error occured. Please refresh the study list and This is displayed when attempting to add an exposure, and the
try again. applicable examination does not exist.
Check that the applicable examination has not moved to another CS-7.
Error occured in Study Sharing. The study was not moved. This is displayed when attempting to receive an examination
from another CS-7 in the [Study Sharing] tab and the applicable
examination does not exist, or if the examination is in progress.
Check that the examination is not in progress or has not been
deleted from the applicable CS-7, or that the examination has
not been moved to another CS-7.
AE Title is changed and output Queue is present. Do you want This is displayed when the area selection button is pressed
to continue? while there is untransmitted data.
Error occurred in changing Area. Please try again. This is displayed when it was not possible to switch to the corre-
sponding IP address.

4. Dialog boxes displayed in the body part selection screen


Displayed message Problems/countermeasures
This is displayed when the bar code registered CR cassette exposure
A cassette barcode is registered with this Exam. Tag.
condition is changed to the AeroDR Detector exposure condition.
Are you sure you want to delete barcode registration?
Press [OK] to cancel the registration.
Are you sure you want to change the image processing param- This may be displayed when changing the image processing
eters? value for the exposure condition.
Press [OK] to change the image processing parameter.
Are you sure you want to delete barcode registration? This is displayed when deleting the exposure condition with the
bar code registered.

Chapter 7
You cannot register more than {The maximum number that can This is displayed when trying to add an exposure condition exceeding
be registered} images. the maximum number of exposure conditions that can be registered.
Cannot capture images due to low battery power. This is displayed when the battery level of the AeroDR Detector
Charge the battery. is getting low. Cha